1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 0
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 0
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 0
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
116 \notefontcolor #0000ff
133 \paragraph_separation skip
136 \quotes_style english
140 \paperpagestyle default
141 \tracking_changes true
142 \output_changes false
146 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
147 \author 274215730 "scott"
148 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
202 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3364 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3366 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3384 manual for information on how to use it.
3387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3391 \begin_layout Standard
3392 Each class has a default set of options.
3393 Here's a quick table describing them:
3396 \begin_layout Standard
3397 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3405 \begin_inset Tabular
3406 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3407 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3866 \begin_layout Standard
3867 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 You're probably also wondering what
3875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3887 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3888 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3893 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3898 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3908 headings, there are also
3916 headings, and so on.
3917 We will describe these headings fully in section
3918 \begin_inset space ~
3922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3924 reference "subsec:Headings"
3931 \begin_layout Subsection
3933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3935 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3940 \begin_inset Index idx
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3962 \begin_layout Standard
3963 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3980 \begin_inset space ~
3985 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3987 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3988 doesn't support special options you want to
3989 use for your document.
3990 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3991 -class and its options, you have to read
3995 \begin_layout Standard
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset space ~
4017 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4018 You can choose between the following five options:
4021 \begin_layout Labeling
4022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 Use default page style of current class.
4030 \begin_layout Labeling
4031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4036 No page numbers or headings.
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4048 \begin_layout Labeling
4049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4055 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4056 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4057 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4060 \begin_layout Labeling
4061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4066 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4067 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4073 \begin_inset Index idx
4076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4078 -packages ! fancyhdr
4084 How they are defined is explained in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4106 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4113 \begin_layout Subsection
4114 Paper Size and Orientation
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 Document ! Paper size
4125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4127 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4134 \begin_layout Standard
4135 You can find the following options in the menu
4138 \begin_inset space ~
4145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 \begin_layout Labeling
4162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4166 \begin_inset space ~
4171 What size paper to print on.
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4203 US letter, US legal, US executive
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Labeling
4220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4225 To choose whether to output as
4236 \begin_layout Labeling
4237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4241 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4247 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4250 \begin_layout Subsection
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4254 name "subsec:Margins"
4259 \begin_inset Index idx
4262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 \begin_inset Index idx
4272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 Paper margins are set in the menu
4284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4288 \begin_inset Index idx
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4302 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4303 the paper format and the font size into account.
4306 \begin_layout Subsection
4310 \begin_layout Standard
4311 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4317 That includes the paragraph environments.
4318 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4319 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4320 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4322 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4331 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4333 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4334 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4335 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4338 \begin_layout Section
4339 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 Paragraph ! Indentation
4352 \begin_layout Subsection
4354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4356 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4365 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4370 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4371 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4372 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4376 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4382 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4383 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4384 language than English.
4386 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4389 \begin_layout Standard
4390 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4391 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4392 into \SpecialChar LyX
4394 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4397 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4399 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4400 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4401 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4408 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4409 goes to produce a printable file.
4414 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4416 gives you the ability globally to change
4420 these pre-coded spacings.
4421 We will explain more later.
4424 \begin_layout Subsection
4425 Paragraph Separation
4426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4428 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4433 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 Paragraph ! Separation
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4461 \begin_inset space ~
4468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset Index idx
4475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4484 \begin_layout Subsection
4488 \begin_layout Standard
4489 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4494 \begin_inset space ~
4499 dialog and toggle the
4502 \begin_inset space ~
4507 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4510 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4514 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4515 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4519 \begin_layout Standard
4520 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4521 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4524 \begin_layout Subsection
4526 \begin_inset Index idx
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4538 \begin_layout Standard
4541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4545 \begin_inset Index idx
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4561 \begin_inset space ~
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4582 -packages ! setspace
4587 installed to use this feature.
4592 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4596 \begin_inset space ~
4601 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4602 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4605 \begin_layout Section
4606 Paragraph Environments
4607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4609 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4618 Paragraph ! Environments
4624 \begin_inset Index idx
4627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4628 Paragraph environments|(
4636 \begin_layout Subsection
4640 \begin_layout Standard
4641 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4653 } \SpecialChar ldots
4663 \begin_inset Newline newline
4666 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4670 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4679 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4682 \begin_layout Standard
4683 A paragraph environment is simply a
4684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4691 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4692 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4693 scheme, labels, and so on.
4694 Additionally, you can
4695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4702 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4703 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4704 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4705 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4707 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4709 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4714 \begin_inset Graphics
4715 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4721 at the left end of the toolbar.
4723 will change the environment of the
4727 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4728 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4729 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4742 create a new paragraph using the
4746 paragraph environment.
4748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4755 because if you are in one of these environments:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4802 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4806 , rather than resetting it to
4811 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4818 reference "sec:Nesting"
4825 \begin_layout Subsection
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 The default paragraph environment is
4835 It creates a plain paragraph.
4837 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4838 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4839 this manual) are in the
4846 \begin_layout Standard
4847 You can nest a paragraph using the
4851 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4859 \begin_layout Subsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4875 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4884 for thanks or contact information.
4885 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4886 places all of this on a separate page
4887 along with today's date.
4888 For other types of documents, the title
4889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4896 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4902 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4916 Here's how you use them:
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 Put the title of your document in the
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 Put the author name in the
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4937 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4943 Note that using this environment is optional.
4944 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4945 will automatically insert today's date.
4946 If you don't want a date, use the option
4948 Suppress default date on front page
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 \begin_inset space ~
4963 \begin_layout Standard
4964 You can use footnotes to insert
4965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4972 or contact information.
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_inset Index idx
4980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "subsec:Headings"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4999 takes care of the numbering for you.
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 \begin_inset Index idx
5007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5008 Section headings ! Numbered
5016 \begin_layout Standard
5017 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5065 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5066 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5067 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5071 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5072 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5073 You group the book into chapters.
5075 does a similar grouping:
5078 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 is divided into either
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Itemize
5142 \begin_layout Itemize
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Not all document types use the
5167 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5172 is the top-level heading.
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5185 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5186 labels it with its number,
5187 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5189 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5203 \begin_inset Index idx
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 The unnumbered section headings have a
5217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5224 at the end of their name.
5225 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5226 the table of contents, see section
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5241 Changing the Numbering
5242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5244 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5253 in the Table of Contents.
5254 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5256 Just as certain classes start with
5270 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5280 This is something you can change.
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5290 \begin_inset Index idx
5293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5302 \begin_inset space ~
5306 \begin_inset space ~
5311 you will see two counters.
5316 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5317 numbers a section heading.
5318 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5323 Short Titles of Headings
5324 \begin_inset Index idx
5327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5328 Section headings ! Short titles
5334 \begin_inset Argument 1
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5354 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5355 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5356 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5357 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5362 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5363 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5364 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5365 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5370 \begin_inset space ~
5376 This will insert a box labeled
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset space ~
5385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5388 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5389 This also works for captions inside floats.
5390 There can only be one short title per title.
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 The following information applies to all section headings:
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5406 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
5410 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5421 \begin_layout Subsection
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5427 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5441 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5442 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5443 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5444 the text they contain.
5445 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5453 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5456 \begin_layout Standard
5457 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5466 when you start a new paragraph.
5467 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5471 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5472 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5473 have to change back to the
5477 environment yourself.
5480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5489 \begin_inset Index idx
5492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5503 time for the differences.
5512 are identical except for one difference:
5516 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5525 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's an example of the
5542 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5544 See – no indentation!
5548 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5549 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5550 the other paragraph.
5553 \begin_layout Standard
5554 Here's another example, this time in the
5561 \begin_layout Quotation
5567 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5568 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5569 the first line, then
5573 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5577 you were quoting other text.
5580 \begin_layout Quotation
5581 Here's a new paragraph.
5582 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5583 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 As the examples show,
5591 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5592 They should put quotes in the
5597 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5601 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 \begin_inset Index idx
5619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_layout Standard
5640 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5646 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 Which I did not rehearse!
5653 It could be much worse.
5654 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5656 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5657 indented a bit more than the first.
5658 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5664 \begin_inset Newline newline
5667 And make things look fine
5668 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 arg "newline-insert newline"
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5685 does not indent both margins.
5686 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5687 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5690 arg "newline-insert newline"
5696 \begin_layout Subsection
5698 \begin_inset Index idx
5701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5717 \begin_layout Standard
5719 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5729 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5730 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5739 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5740 lets you provide your own label.
5741 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5742 describing some general features of all four of them.
5745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5752 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5753 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5762 reset the environment to
5766 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5767 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5768 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5776 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5784 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5785 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5786 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5788 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5789 you read all of section
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5796 reference "sec:Nesting"
5803 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5805 \begin_inset Index idx
5808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5824 \begin_layout Standard
5825 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5829 paragraph environment.
5830 It has the following properties:
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5843 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 The items can have any length.
5851 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5852 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 environment inside another
5868 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5872 \begin_layout Itemize
5873 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5876 \begin_layout Itemize
5878 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5881 \begin_layout Itemize
5883 \begin_inset space ~
5887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5889 reference "sec:Nesting"
5893 for a full explanation of nesting.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5907 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5912 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 The label for the first level
5920 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 The label for the second level is a dash.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5939 \begin_layout Itemize
5940 Back out to the third level.
5944 \begin_layout Itemize
5945 Back to the second level.
5949 \begin_layout Itemize
5950 Back to the outermost level.
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 These are the default labels for an
5959 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5964 dialog in the submenu
5969 \begin_inset Index idx
5972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5984 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5986 \begin_inset space ~
5990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5992 reference "sec:Nesting"
5999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6001 \begin_inset Index idx
6004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Enumerate"
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6025 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6026 It has these properties:
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6030 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6034 \begin_layout Enumerate
6035 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6039 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 environment resets the counter to one.
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6067 Items can have any length.
6070 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6074 \begin_layout Enumerate
6075 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6083 \begin_layout Standard
6092 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6094 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6095 labels the four different levels in an
6102 \begin_layout Enumerate
6103 The first level of an
6107 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6125 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Back to the third level
6136 \begin_layout Enumerate
6137 Back to the second level.
6141 \begin_layout Enumerate
6142 Back to the outermost level.
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6150 environment, see section
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6157 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6162 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 There is more to nesting
6171 environments than we've stated here.
6172 You should read section
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6179 reference "sec:Nesting"
6183 to learn more about nesting.
6186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6188 \begin_inset Index idx
6191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6205 list has no fixed label.
6206 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6215 of the first line as the label.
6219 \begin_layout Description
6220 Example: This is an example of the
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6229 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 it is meant that the first usage of the
6246 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6248 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6256 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6276 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6280 for more information.) Here is an example:
6283 \begin_layout Description
6285 \begin_inset space ~
6288 Example: This one shows how to use a
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_layout Description
6304 Usage: You should use the
6308 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6309 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6311 It's not a good idea to use a
6315 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6316 You're better off using
6328 paragraphs into them.
6331 \begin_layout Description
6332 Nesting: You can nest
6336 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6341 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6342 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6343 them from the first line.
6346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6348 \begin_inset Index idx
6351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6360 \begin_layout Standard
6365 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6366 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6379 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6381 Here are its properties:
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 \begin_inset space ~
6390 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6399 of each line as the item label.
6404 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6405 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6406 space as described above.
6409 \begin_layout Labeling
6410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6411 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6412 uses different margins for the item label and the
6413 body of the item text.
6414 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6415 label width plus a little extra space.
6419 \begin_layout Labeling
6420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6425 width \SpecialChar LyX
6426 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6427 If the label width is larger, the label
6428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6435 into the first line.
6436 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6437 margin of the rest of the item text.
6440 \begin_layout Labeling
6441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6443 \begin_inset space ~
6446 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6451 environment has the same left margin.
6452 \begin_inset Newline newline
6455 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 dialog (toolbar button
6468 arg "layout-paragraph"
6475 \begin_inset space ~
6480 determines the default label width.
6481 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6490 multiple times instead.
6491 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6509 every time you alter a label in a
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 The predefined default width is the length of
6518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6526 \begin_inset space ~
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6537 list the same way as the
6541 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6547 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6556 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6557 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6559 \begin_inset space ~
6563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6565 reference "sec:Nesting"
6569 to learn about nesting.
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6573 There is yet another feature of the
6577 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6578 left-justifies the item labels by
6580 You can use additional
6584 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6585 justifies the item label.
6590 are documented in section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6602 Here are some examples:
6605 \begin_layout Labeling
6606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6607 Left The default for
6614 \begin_layout Labeling
6615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6623 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6626 \begin_layout Labeling
6627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6628 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6632 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6642 \begin_layout Subsection
6644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6646 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6664 The features described in this section require that the module
6666 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6668 is loaded in the document settings.
6669 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6680 -packages ! enumitem
6688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6689 Custom Enumerate Lists
6690 \begin_inset Index idx
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6704 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6710 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6711 There you add the command
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6736 Code, look at section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6756 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6763 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6764 For capital Roman numerals replace
6776 in the command above.
6777 For Arabic numerals use
6785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6792 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6809 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 You can only number 26
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6821 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6830 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6831 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6834 \begin_layout Standard
6835 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6838 \begin_layout Enumerate
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6868 \begin_layout Enumerate
6869 \begin_inset Argument 1
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6895 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6928 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_inset Argument 1
6932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 For this list these commands were used:
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6973 \begin_inset Newline newline
6981 \begin_inset Newline newline
6989 \begin_inset Newline newline
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7006 makes the label emphasized and
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7025 lists until you change the definition.
7033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7035 \begin_inset Index idx
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 \begin_inset Argument 1
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_inset Note Note
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 goes back to default numbering
7086 \begin_layout Enumerate
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7104 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7105 to indicate that it is a resumed
7106 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7107 , but in the output.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7129 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7131 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7132 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7133 of a normal enumeration.
7134 There, insert the command
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7148 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7156 \begin_layout Enumerate
7160 \begin_layout Standard
7161 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7164 \begin_layout Enumerate
7165 \begin_inset Argument 1
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 This enumeration starts at 4
7187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7204 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7207 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 with standard spacing
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7218 Add there the command
7222 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7225 \begin_layout Itemize
7226 \begin_inset Argument 1
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7248 \begin_layout Itemize
7252 \begin_layout Itemize
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7264 \begin_inset Index idx
7267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7269 -packages ! enumitem
7275 For more information see its documentation,
7276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7289 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7290 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7294 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_inset Argument 1
7301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7309 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7322 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 with negative indentation
7326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7327 Further Customization
7328 \begin_inset Index idx
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 Lists ! Customization
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 You can also change the style of description lists.
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 changes the description label font, the command
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 sets the list style.
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 An example where the command
7369 \begin_layout Standard
7374 itshape, style=nextline
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_layout Description
7383 \begin_inset space ~
7387 \begin_inset Argument 1
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7398 itshape, style=nextline
7408 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7409 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7413 \begin_layout Description
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7418 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7419 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7420 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7430 \begin_inset Index idx
7433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7435 -packages ! enumitem
7441 For more information see its documentation
7442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7452 \begin_layout Subsection
7454 \begin_inset Index idx
7457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7471 Address: An Overview
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7475 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7476 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7484 \begin_inset space ~
7490 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7491 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7492 gags on the document.
7493 In contrast, you can use the
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7506 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 Of course, you're not limited to using
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7532 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7533 some European academic papers.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7540 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7552 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7553 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7562 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7563 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7564 Here's an example of each:
7567 \begin_layout Right Address
7569 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 \begin_inset Newline newline
7577 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 When is it? What is today?
7583 \begin_layout Standard
7587 \begin_inset space ~
7593 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7595 the largest block of text on a single line.
7596 Here's an example of the
7603 \begin_layout Address
7605 \begin_inset Newline newline
7608 Where do I send this
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7612 Your post office and country
7615 \begin_layout Standard
7616 As you can see, both
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7628 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7633 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7634 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7640 This makes sense, since
7648 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7649 Thus, you have to use
7656 arg "newline-insert newline"
7661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7673 ) to start a new line in an
7680 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_layout Subsection
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7693 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7694 or list of references.
7696 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset Index idx
7704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7718 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7719 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7720 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7721 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7735 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7736 The book document classes ignores the
7740 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7744 in a letter document class.
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7752 environment does several things for you.
7753 First, it puts the centered label
7754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7762 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7764 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7765 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7766 the subsequent text.
7767 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7769 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 The new paragraph will still be in the
7784 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7785 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_inset Float figure
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset Graphics
7797 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7810 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 We would love to demonstrate the
7836 environment, but since this document is in the
7837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7844 class, we can't do this.
7845 We inserted it therefore as figure
7846 \begin_inset space ~
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7852 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7857 If you have never heard of an
7858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7865 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7882 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment is used to list references.
7895 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7896 only use it at the end of the document.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 When you first open a
7913 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7914 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7930 depending on the document class.
7931 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7932 Each paragraph of the
7936 environment is a bibliography entry.
7941 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7942 Each new paragraph is still in the
7949 \begin_layout Standard
7950 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7951 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7953 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7955 handling, have a look at section
7956 \begin_inset space ~
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7962 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7969 \begin_layout Subsection
7970 Special Environments
7973 \begin_layout Standard
7975 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7976 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7997 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8010 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8012 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8017 key as a fixed whitespace.
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8039 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8057 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8060 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8063 arg "newline-insert newline"
8080 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8081 So, when you finish using the
8086 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8087 Also, you can nest the
8092 environment inside of others.
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8103 arg "newline-insert newline"
8106 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8111 \begin_inset space \space{}
8121 arg "newline-insert newline"
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 arg "newline-insert newline"
8141 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8147 \begin_layout Itemize
8148 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8149 You must put at least one
8153 in any line you want blank.
8154 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8163 since that will insert
8168 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8171 arg "self-insert \""
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 printf("Hello World!
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8211 \begin_layout Standard
8212 This is just the standard
8213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8230 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8232 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8233 as if you used a typewriter.
8234 \begin_inset Index idx
8237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8238 Paragraph environments|)
8243 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8246 Program Code Listings
8251 \begin_inset space ~
8259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8263 \begin_inset Index idx
8266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8280 environment is similar to the
8285 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8286 computer console text.
8291 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8305 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8306 you can have empty lines.
8319 \begin_layout Itemize
8320 have a certain language and a text style
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8325 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8326 and \SpecialChar TeX
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Because of these properties
8335 works like a typewriter.
8339 \begin_layout Verbatim
8343 \begin_layout Verbatim
8346 The following 2 lines are empty:
8349 \begin_layout Verbatim
8353 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8363 \begin_layout Standard
8368 environment is identical to
8372 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8373 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8380 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8384 \begin_layout Section
8385 Nesting Environments
8386 \begin_inset Index idx
8389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8390 Nesting ! Environments
8396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8405 \begin_layout Subsection
8409 \begin_layout Standard
8411 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8413 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8415 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8417 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8429 \begin_layout Enumerate
8433 \begin_layout Enumerate
8438 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8447 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Standard
8452 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8453 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8457 \begin_inset space ~
8461 \begin_inset space ~
8469 \begin_inset space ~
8473 \begin_inset space ~
8478 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8480 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8483 arg "depth-increment"
8489 arg "depth-decrement"
8503 arg "depth-increment"
8509 arg "depth-decrement"
8513 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8514 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8518 \begin_layout Standard
8519 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8520 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8521 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8522 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8523 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8526 \begin_layout Standard
8527 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8529 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8531 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8534 \begin_layout Subsection
8535 What You Can and Can't Nest
8538 \begin_layout Standard
8539 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8540 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8543 \begin_layout Standard
8544 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8545 than a simple yes or no.
8546 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8549 \begin_layout Itemize
8550 Completely unnestable
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8564 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8565 environments have them:
8568 \begin_layout Description
8569 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8570 Can't nest into them.
8574 \begin_layout Itemize
8580 \begin_layout Itemize
8586 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8605 \begin_layout Description
8607 \begin_inset space ~
8610 Nestable You can nest them.
8611 You can nest other things into them.
8615 \begin_layout Itemize
8621 \begin_layout Itemize
8627 \begin_layout Itemize
8633 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8645 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Description
8678 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8679 You can't nest anything into them.
8683 \begin_layout Itemize
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8707 \begin_layout Itemize
8713 \begin_layout Itemize
8719 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8731 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8743 \begin_layout Itemize
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_inset space ~
8771 \begin_layout Itemize
8778 \begin_layout Standard
8779 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8787 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8797 \begin_inset space ~
8800 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8801 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8802 nested section headings violate this.
8810 \begin_layout Subsection
8811 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8812 \begin_inset Index idx
8815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8816 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8824 \begin_layout Standard
8825 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8826 affected by nesting anyhow.
8830 \begin_layout Itemize
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8842 \begin_layout Standard
8844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8852 Figures and tables in
8856 are not affected by this.
8861 Have a look at section
8862 \begin_inset space ~
8866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8868 reference "sec:Floats"
8872 for more information about
8879 \begin_layout Standard
8881 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8882 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8886 \begin_layout Standard
8887 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8895 of its own, it behaves just like a
8896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8903 paragraph environment.
8904 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8908 \begin_layout Standard
8909 Here's an example with a table:
8912 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 \begin_layout Enumerate
8918 This is (a) and it's nested.
8922 \begin_layout Standard
8923 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8929 \begin_layout Standard
8931 \begin_inset Tabular
8932 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8933 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8935 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9019 \begin_layout Standard
9020 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9027 \begin_layout Enumerate
9029 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9037 \begin_layout Standard
9038 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9041 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 \begin_layout Enumerate
9047 This is (a) and it's nested.
9051 \begin_layout Standard
9052 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9058 \begin_layout Standard
9060 \begin_inset Tabular
9061 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9062 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9149 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9155 \begin_layout Enumerate
9162 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9165 \begin_layout Enumerate
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9170 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9175 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9178 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9181 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 \begin_layout Enumerate
9187 This is (a) and it's nested.
9190 \begin_layout Standard
9191 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9197 \begin_layout Standard
9199 \begin_inset Tabular
9200 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9201 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9288 \begin_layout Standard
9289 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9295 \begin_layout Enumerate
9297 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9304 \begin_layout Enumerate
9308 \begin_layout Standard
9309 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9315 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9316 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9320 \begin_layout Subsection
9321 Usage and General Features
9324 \begin_layout Standard
9325 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9326 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9335 is the innermost possible depth.
9336 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9339 \begin_layout Enumerate
9340 level #1 – outermost
9344 \begin_layout Enumerate
9349 \begin_layout Enumerate
9354 \begin_layout Enumerate
9359 \begin_layout Itemize
9364 \begin_layout Itemize
9373 \begin_layout Standard
9374 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9375 both of them in the example.
9376 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9386 For example, if we tried to nest another
9391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9398 , we would get errors.
9401 \begin_layout Subsection
9403 \begin_inset Index idx
9406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9415 \begin_layout Standard
9416 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9417 We have several examples of nested environments.
9418 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9423 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9426 \begin_layout Labeling
9427 \labelwidthstring MMM
9428 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9437 \begin_layout Labeling
9438 \labelwidthstring MMM
9439 #2-a This is level #2.
9440 We created it by using
9443 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9449 arg "depth-increment"
9456 \begin_layout Labeling
9457 \labelwidthstring MMM
9458 #3-a This is level #3.
9459 This time, we just enter
9466 arg "depth-increment"
9470 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9474 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9480 arg "depth-increment"
9487 \begin_layout Standard
9492 environment, nested inside of
9493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9501 So, it's at level #4.
9502 We did this by entering
9505 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9511 arg "depth-increment"
9514 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9519 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9535 \begin_layout Standard
9540 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9543 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9549 \begin_layout Labeling
9550 \labelwidthstring MMM
9551 #4-a This is level #4.
9555 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9558 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9563 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9567 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9572 keep nesting things inside
9573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9584 \begin_layout Labeling
9585 \labelwidthstring MMM
9586 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9591 \begin_layout Labeling
9592 \labelwidthstring MMM
9593 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9594 and this is level #6.
9595 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9599 \begin_layout Labeling
9600 \labelwidthstring MMM
9601 #5-b Back to level #5.
9605 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9611 arg "depth-decrement"
9618 \begin_layout Labeling
9619 \labelwidthstring MMM
9623 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9629 arg "depth-decrement"
9632 , we're back at level #4.
9636 \begin_layout Labeling
9637 \labelwidthstring MMM
9638 #3-b Back to level #3.
9639 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9643 \begin_layout Labeling
9644 \labelwidthstring MMM
9645 #2-b Back to level #2.
9650 \begin_layout Labeling
9651 \labelwidthstring MMM
9652 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9653 After this sentence, we will enter
9657 and change the paragraph environment back to
9664 \begin_layout Standard
9665 We could have also used the
9681 environment in place of the
9686 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9690 Example 2: Inheritance
9693 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9694 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9697 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9706 arg "depth-increment"
9710 \begin_inset Newline newline
9713 which, we will change to the
9721 \begin_layout Enumerate
9726 environment, at level #2.
9729 \begin_layout Enumerate
9730 Notice how the nested
9734 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9738 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9742 \begin_layout Standard
9743 We ended this example by entering
9748 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9752 and reset the nesting depth by using
9755 arg "depth-decrement"
9761 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9762 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9771 \begin_inset Argument 1
9774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9775 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9783 \begin_layout Enumerate
9784 This is level #1, in an
9788 paragraph environment.
9789 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9793 \begin_layout Enumerate
9798 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9804 arg "depth-increment"
9808 Now, what happens if we nest an
9812 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9813 label be? An asterisk?
9817 \begin_layout Itemize
9827 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9828 So, its label is a bullet.
9829 (We got here by using
9832 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9838 arg "depth-increment"
9841 , then changing the environment to
9849 \begin_layout Itemize
9850 Here's level #4, produced using
9853 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9859 arg "depth-increment"
9863 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9868 \begin_layout Enumerate
9871 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9876 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9880 , because we are in the
9888 environment (that is, it is an
9903 \begin_layout Enumerate
9908 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9909 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9913 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9917 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9920 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9923 \begin_layout Enumerate
9927 arg "depth-decrement"
9930 to decrease the depth after the next
9933 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9940 \begin_layout Enumerate
9942 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9947 \begin_layout Enumerate
9949 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9950 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9954 \begin_layout Enumerate
9955 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9964 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9969 reset the counter for the label.
9973 \begin_layout Enumerate
9977 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9983 arg "depth-decrement"
9986 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9987 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9988 into the twofold-nested
9996 \begin_layout Enumerate
9997 The same thing happens if we do another
10000 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10006 arg "depth-decrement"
10009 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10012 \begin_layout Standard
10013 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10018 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10029 The number of other
10033 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10040 The same rule applies for the
10044 environment, as well.
10047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10048 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10051 \begin_layout Enumerate
10052 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10053 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10054 the same detail with how we did it.
10063 \begin_layout Standard
10071 arg "depth-increment"
10078 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10079 the example in parentheses someplace.
10080 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10081 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10082 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10086 \begin_layout Enumerate
10091 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10095 \begin_layout Verse
10096 Now we will add verse.
10097 \begin_inset Newline newline
10100 It will get much worse.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10111 arg "depth-increment"
10121 \begin_layout Verse
10122 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10123 \begin_inset Newline newline
10126 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10133 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10141 \begin_layout Verse
10142 Here comes a table:
10146 \begin_layout Standard
10147 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10153 \begin_layout Standard
10155 \begin_inset Tabular
10156 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10157 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10244 \begin_layout Verse
10248 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10258 arg "depth-increment"
10264 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10270 \begin_inset Newline newline
10278 arg "depth-decrement"
10285 \begin_layout Enumerate
10290 : level #1) This is another item.
10291 Note that selecting a
10295 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10296 3 times to put the table inside the
10304 \begin_layout Quotation
10305 We're now ending the
10309 list and changing to
10314 We're still at level #1.
10315 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10316 The next set of paragraphs is a
10317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10324 We will nest both the
10331 \begin_inset space ~
10336 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10340 for the letter body.
10344 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10347 to preserve the depth.
10348 Remember that you need to use
10351 arg "newline-insert newline"
10354 to create multiple lines inside the
10361 \begin_inset space ~
10371 \begin_layout Right Address
10373 \begin_inset Newline newline
10376 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10377 \begin_inset Newline newline
10383 \begin_layout Address
10385 \begin_inset space ~
10391 \begin_layout Quotation
10392 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10396 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10397 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10398 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10399 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10400 as soon as possible.
10401 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10404 \begin_layout Quotation
10405 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10406 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10407 with your order, along with payment.
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 We thank you again for your patience.
10414 \begin_layout Address
10416 \begin_inset Newline newline
10423 \begin_layout Quotation
10424 That ends that example!
10427 \begin_layout Standard
10428 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10429 gives you a lot of power with just
10431 We could have easily nested an
10452 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10455 \begin_layout Subsection
10457 \begin_inset Index idx
10460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10461 Nesting ! Separation
10467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10469 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10476 \begin_layout Standard
10477 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10479 For example you need two different enumerations:
10482 \begin_layout Enumerate
10487 \begin_layout Enumerate
10492 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Standard
10497 \begin_inset Separator plain
10503 \begin_layout Itemize
10509 \begin_layout Standard
10510 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10516 \begin_layout Enumerate
10520 \begin_layout Enumerate
10524 \begin_layout Enumerate
10528 \begin_layout Standard
10529 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10530 list item and use the menu
10532 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10533 Start New Environment
10536 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10537 ) and behind it the new list.
10540 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10541 Start New Parent Environment
10543 only appears if the item is nested.
10544 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10548 \begin_layout Standard
10549 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10550 (red arrow in LyX).
10551 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10552 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10555 \begin_layout Standard
10556 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10559 arg "paragraph-break"
10566 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10569 \begin_layout Section
10570 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10571 \begin_inset Index idx
10574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10583 \begin_layout Standard
10584 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10585 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10587 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10588 be broken at the end of a line.
10589 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10593 \begin_layout Subsection
10595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10597 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10602 \begin_inset Index idx
10605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10614 \begin_layout Standard
10615 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10616 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10617 ) not to break the line at
10619 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10622 \begin_layout Quote
10623 Further documentation is given in section
10624 \begin_inset Newline newline
10628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10630 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10638 \begin_layout Standard
10639 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10654 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10663 A protected space is set with
10665 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10666 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10668 \begin_inset space ~
10676 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10682 \begin_layout Subsection
10684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10686 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10691 \begin_inset Index idx
10694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10695 Spacing ! Horizontal
10703 \begin_layout Standard
10704 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10707 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10711 The length units are listed in Appendix
10712 \begin_inset space ~
10716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10718 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10729 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10734 \begin_inset Index idx
10737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10738 Spaces ! Inter-word
10746 \begin_layout Standard
10747 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10748 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10749 at the ends of sentences.
10750 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10751 automatically takes care about this.
10752 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10753 followed by a period; see section
10754 \begin_inset space ~
10758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10760 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10765 To insert a normal space, select
10767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10770 \begin_inset space ~
10778 arg "space-insert normal"
10784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10788 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10793 \begin_inset Index idx
10796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10805 \begin_layout Standard
10807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10814 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10823 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10824 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10825 inside abbreviations:
10828 \begin_layout Quote
10830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10834 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10837 \begin_layout Standard
10838 or between values and units.
10839 Compare for example this:
10840 \begin_inset Newline newline
10844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10848 \begin_inset Newline newline
10851 10 kg (normal space
10854 \begin_layout Standard
10855 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10860 \begin_inset space ~
10868 arg "space-insert thin"
10874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10878 \begin_layout Standard
10879 You can also insert the following space types:
10882 \begin_layout Description
10884 \begin_inset space ~
10888 \begin_inset space ~
10891 space A line with a
10892 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10896 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10900 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10903 negative thin space between the arrows.
10906 \begin_layout Description
10908 \begin_inset space ~
10912 \begin_inset space ~
10915 space A line with a
10916 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10920 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10924 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10927 negative medium space between the arrows.
10930 \begin_layout Description
10932 \begin_inset space ~
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10939 space A line with a
10940 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10944 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10948 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10951 negative thick space between the arrows.
10954 \begin_layout Description
10956 \begin_inset space ~
10960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10964 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10968 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10972 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10976 \begin_inset space ~
10980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 em) space between the arrows.
10986 \begin_layout Description
10988 \begin_inset space ~
10992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10996 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11000 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11004 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11008 \begin_inset space ~
11012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 em) space between the arrows.
11018 \begin_layout Description
11020 \begin_inset space ~
11024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11028 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11032 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11036 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11040 \begin_inset space ~
11044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11047 em) space between the arrows.
11050 \begin_layout Description
11052 \begin_inset space ~
11056 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11060 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11065 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11072 cm space between the arrows.
11075 \begin_layout Standard
11077 \begin_inset space ~
11081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11083 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11087 lists the different space sizes.
11090 \begin_layout Standard
11091 \begin_inset Float table
11096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11097 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11102 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11106 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11116 \begin_inset Tabular
11117 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11118 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11120 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11236 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11395 \begin_inset Index idx
11398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11407 \begin_layout Standard
11408 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11409 feature for adding extra space
11410 in a uniform fashion.
11411 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11412 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11413 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11414 equally between themselves.
11417 \begin_layout Standard
11418 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11421 \begin_layout Quote
11423 This is on the left side
11424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11427 This is on the right
11430 \begin_layout Quote
11433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11443 \begin_layout Quote
11446 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11450 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11454 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11460 \begin_layout Standard
11461 That was an example in the
11467 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11471 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11475 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11478 is one in a standard paragraph.
11479 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11483 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11486 \begin_layout Standard
11487 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11490 \begin_inset space ~
11495 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11500 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11504 \begin_inset space ~
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11512 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11516 \begin_inset space ~
11522 \begin_layout Standard
11524 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11528 \begin_inset space ~
11534 \begin_layout Standard
11536 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11540 \begin_inset space ~
11546 \begin_layout Standard
11548 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11552 \begin_inset space ~
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11560 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11564 \begin_inset space ~
11570 \begin_layout Standard
11571 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11579 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11583 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11585 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11586 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11590 option in the space dialog.
11598 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11602 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11607 \begin_inset Index idx
11610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11619 \begin_layout Standard
11620 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11621 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11624 \begin_layout Standard
11625 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11628 What is correct English?:
11629 \begin_inset Newline newline
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset space ~
11640 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11641 \begin_inset Newline newline
11645 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11656 \begin_inset Newline newline
11660 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11671 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11677 \begin_layout Standard
11679 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11684 \begin_inset space ~
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11696 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11699 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11703 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11709 \begin_inset space ~
11713 \begin_inset space ~
11717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11720 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11729 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11730 That is why it is named
11731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11739 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11740 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11744 \begin_layout Subsection
11746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11748 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11753 \begin_inset Index idx
11756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11765 \begin_layout Standard
11766 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11769 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11771 \begin_inset space ~
11777 There you find the following sizes:
11780 \begin_layout Standard
11793 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11794 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11799 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11801 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11802 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11804 \begin_inset space ~
11810 \begin_inset Index idx
11813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11814 Document ! Settings
11819 for the paragraph separation.
11820 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11831 \begin_layout Standard
11837 \begin_inset Index idx
11840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11846 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11847 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11852 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11853 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11862 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11871 s are described in section
11872 \begin_inset space ~
11876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11878 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11887 If there are several
11891 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11892 You can therefore use
11896 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11899 \begin_layout Standard
11904 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11905 \begin_inset space ~
11909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11911 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11918 \begin_layout Standard
11919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11929 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11930 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11942 \begin_layout Subsection
11943 Paragraph Alignment
11944 \begin_inset Index idx
11947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11948 Paragraph ! Alignment
11956 \begin_layout Standard
11957 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11962 dialog (toolbar button
11965 arg "layout-paragraph"
11969 There are five possibilities:
11972 \begin_layout Itemize
11980 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11986 \begin_layout Itemize
11994 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12000 \begin_layout Itemize
12008 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12014 \begin_layout Itemize
12022 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12028 \begin_layout Itemize
12036 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12042 \begin_layout Standard
12043 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12044 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12045 the left and right margins.
12046 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12051 This paragraph is right aligned,
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12056 this one is centered,
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12061 this one is left aligned.
12064 \begin_layout Subsection
12066 \begin_inset Index idx
12069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12070 Page breaks ! Forced
12076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12078 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12086 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12087 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12088 force a page break where you want one.
12089 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12090 is good at page breaking.
12091 Only if you use a lot of
12095 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12096 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12099 \begin_layout Standard
12100 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12101 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12105 have to change the page breaking.
12108 \begin_layout Standard
12109 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12111 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12116 \begin_inset space ~
12122 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12125 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12127 \begin_inset space ~
12132 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12134 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12135 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12138 \begin_layout Standard
12139 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12140 at the top of a page.
12141 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12143 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12144 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12145 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12149 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12153 to learn more about
12160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12164 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12169 \begin_inset Index idx
12172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12173 Page breaks ! Clear
12181 \begin_layout Standard
12182 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12183 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12184 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12185 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12186 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12189 \begin_layout Standard
12190 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12195 \begin_inset space ~
12201 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12204 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12206 \begin_inset space ~
12210 \begin_inset space ~
12215 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12216 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12219 \begin_layout Subsection
12221 \begin_inset Index idx
12224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12233 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12240 \begin_layout Standard
12241 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12243 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12248 \begin_inset space ~
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12260 arg "newline-insert newline"
12264 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12267 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12273 \begin_inset space ~
12281 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12284 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12286 This is useful to avoid
12287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12294 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12297 \begin_layout Standard
12298 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12299 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12301 very good at line breaking.
12302 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12303 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12304 \begin_inset space ~
12308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12310 reference "sec:Quote"
12315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12317 reference "sec:Verse"
12322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12324 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12331 \begin_layout Subsection
12333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12335 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12340 \begin_inset Index idx
12343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12354 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12365 \begin_layout Standard
12369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12370 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12372 \begin_inset space ~
12377 you can insert horizontal lines.
12378 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12379 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12380 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12383 \begin_layout Standard
12385 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12396 \begin_layout Section
12397 Characters and Symbols
12400 \begin_layout Standard
12401 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12402 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12403 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12411 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12415 for information on how this is done.
12418 \begin_layout Standard
12419 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12424 dialog via the menu
12426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12427 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12433 \begin_layout Standard
12434 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12442 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12443 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12445 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12453 \begin_layout Section
12454 Fonts and Text Styles
12455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12457 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12464 \begin_layout Subsection
12466 \begin_inset Index idx
12469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12478 \begin_layout Standard
12479 There are two types of fonts:
12482 \begin_layout Description
12484 \begin_inset space ~
12488 \begin_inset Index idx
12491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12497 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12502 characters) in the font.
12503 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12504 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12505 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12506 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12507 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12508 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12509 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12510 \begin_inset Newline newline
12513 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12514 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12515 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12516 sizes than at small ones.
12517 \begin_inset Newline newline
12531 \begin_inset space ~
12539 \begin_layout Description
12541 \begin_inset space ~
12545 \begin_inset Index idx
12548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12554 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12555 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12556 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12557 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12558 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12559 image manipulation program.
12560 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12561 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12562 \begin_inset space ~
12565 pixels high up to 34
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12569 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12570 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12571 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12573 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12574 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12575 \begin_inset Newline newline
12578 Bitmap fonts are named
12581 \begin_inset space ~
12586 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12589 \begin_layout Standard
12590 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12591 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12592 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12593 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12594 use scalable fonts.
12597 \begin_layout Standard
12598 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12601 \begin_layout Standard
12602 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12603 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12604 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12605 font to emphasize text, you use an
12606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12614 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12616 In \SpecialChar LyX
12617 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12621 \begin_layout Subsection
12624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12626 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12633 \begin_layout Standard
12634 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12635 used its own fonts.
12636 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12637 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12641 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12642 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12643 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12644 to a word processor.
12645 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12646 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12647 files are very portable across
12648 different machines.
12649 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 has increased a lot
12651 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12654 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12656 \begin_inset space ~
12660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12662 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12667 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12668 code in the document
12669 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12672 \begin_layout Standard
12673 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12674 engines that are also able directly
12675 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12677 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12679 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12681 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12682 that is installed on your system.
12683 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12686 \begin_layout Standard
12687 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12695 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12696 es; so you might have to experiment.
12704 \begin_layout Subsection
12705 Document Font and Font size
12706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12708 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12713 \begin_inset Index idx
12716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 \begin_inset Index idx
12726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12735 \begin_layout Standard
12736 You can set the document fonts in the
12738 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12742 \begin_inset Index idx
12745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12746 Document ! Settings
12756 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12757 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12760 \begin_inset space ~
12769 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12771 \begin_inset space ~
12774 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12777 \begin_layout Standard
12782 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12783 This requires that you use
12795 as the output format, i.
12796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12800 \begin_inset space \space{}
12803 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12804 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12805 installed (see section
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12812 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12817 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12819 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12820 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12822 \begin_inset space ~
12825 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12826 cannot determine the family.
12827 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12828 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12831 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12834 \begin_layout Standard
12835 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12836 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12841 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12847 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12848 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12856 \begin_inset space ~
12862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12875 European Computer Modern
12878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12885 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12888 \begin_layout Standard
12897 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12898 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12903 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12906 \begin_inset space ~
12911 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12917 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12918 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12921 \begin_layout Itemize
12925 \begin_inset space ~
12930 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12943 \begin_inset space ~
12948 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12949 community in order to replace
12953 as the default font.
12954 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12955 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12958 \begin_inset space ~
12971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12972 One difference is improved kerning.
12980 \begin_layout Itemize
12984 \begin_inset space ~
12988 \begin_inset space ~
12993 fonts in (the rare) case that
12996 \begin_inset space ~
13001 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13016 Virtual means that it
13017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13028 -glyphs from other fonts.
13029 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13051 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13057 \begin_inset Index idx
13060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13062 -packages ! aeguill
13067 with the document preamble line
13068 \begin_inset Newline newline
13075 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13076 \begin_inset Newline newline
13081 will fix the guillemet problem.
13086 and that accented characters are not
13090 glyph, but built of
13094 characters, the accent and the letter.
13095 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13101 If you search for example for the French word
13102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13109 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13118 and not for the glyph
13119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13123 \begin_inset space ~
13127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13133 \begin_layout Itemize
13134 If you do not like the look of
13142 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13153 \begin_inset space ~
13163 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13164 \begin_inset space ~
13167 serif and typewriter fonts,
13171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13172 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13179 \begin_inset space ~
13188 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13193 \begin_inset space \space{}
13201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13205 \begin_inset space \space{}
13211 \begin_inset space ~
13219 \begin_inset space ~
13229 but you can also select your own.
13230 \begin_inset Newline newline
13233 The differences between roman,
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13245 fonts are explained in section
13246 \begin_inset space ~
13250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13252 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13257 \begin_inset Newline newline
13263 \begin_inset space ~
13268 was originally designed for newspapers.
13269 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13270 into the small newspaper columns.
13274 \begin_inset space ~
13279 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13283 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13296 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13301 depends on the class you are using.
13302 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13305 \begin_layout Standard
13306 Note that the font size is the
13311 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13312 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13313 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13314 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13323 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13324 \begin_inset space ~
13328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13330 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13337 \begin_layout Standard
13341 \begin_inset space ~
13346 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13348 \begin_inset space ~
13351 serif or typewriter.
13356 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13366 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13369 \begin_layout Standard
13374 LaTeX font encoding
13376 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13377 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13383 \begin_inset Index idx
13386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13388 -packages ! fontenc
13394 \begin_inset space ~
13398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13400 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13405 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13406 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13413 \begin_layout Standard
13414 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13416 Use Old Style Figures
13420 Use True Small Caps
13423 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13426 Use Old Style Figures
13428 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13430 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13438 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13442 Use True Small Caps
13444 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13445 of scaled capitals.
13446 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13447 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13450 \begin_layout Standard
13455 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13456 a font to display the script characters.
13460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13461 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13467 \begin_inset Index idx
13470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13477 So this has no effect for the document language
13491 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13495 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13503 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13508 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13509 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13511 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13513 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13516 dialog, see section
13517 \begin_inset space ~
13521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13523 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13535 \begin_layout Subsection
13539 \begin_layout Standard
13540 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13541 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13543 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13544 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13545 choose a math font in the dialog
13547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13551 \begin_inset Index idx
13554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13555 Document ! Settings
13561 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13562 automatically selects a math font.
13563 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13564 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13573 \begin_inset space ~
13579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13584 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13585 document font is available.
13588 \begin_layout Standard
13589 Note that the math font will not be used for
13593 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13599 or by the insertion of the command
13606 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13607 \begin_inset space ~
13611 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13612 while the math characters do not.
13614 \begin_inset space ~
13617 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13620 \begin_inset space ~
13628 \begin_inset space ~
13633 in the document font settings.
13636 \begin_layout Standard
13637 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13638 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13639 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13640 font (in most cases
13641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13647 \begin_inset space ~
13653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13656 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13657 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13665 \begin_inset space ~
13671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13677 \begin_layout Subsection
13678 Using Different Character Styles
13679 \begin_inset Index idx
13682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13689 \begin_inset Index idx
13692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13701 \begin_layout Standard
13702 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13703 automatically changes the character style for certain
13704 paragraph environments.
13706 supports two character styles,
13715 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13719 \begin_layout Standard
13724 style, do one of the following:
13727 \begin_layout Itemize
13728 click on the toolbar button
13737 \begin_layout Itemize
13738 use the key binding
13747 \begin_layout Standard
13748 These commands are all toggles.
13753 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13756 \begin_layout Standard
13757 One typically uses the
13761 style for proper names.
13763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13770 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13778 \begin_layout Standard
13779 A more widely used character style is the
13784 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13791 \begin_layout Itemize
13792 clicking on the toolbar button
13801 \begin_layout Itemize
13802 using the keybindings
13811 \begin_layout Standard
13816 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13818 use a different font.
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13822 We've been using the
13826 style all over the place in this document.
13827 Here's one more example:
13830 \begin_layout Quotation
13833 Do not overuse character styles!
13836 \begin_layout Standard
13837 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13838 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13839 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13840 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13844 \begin_layout Standard
13845 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13853 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13855 \begin_inset space ~
13858 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13864 arg "dialog-show character"
13870 \begin_layout Subsection
13871 Fine-Tuning with the
13876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13878 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13883 \begin_inset Index idx
13886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13895 \begin_layout Standard
13896 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13898 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13899 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13900 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13901 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13902 from ordinary dialog.
13905 \begin_layout Standard
13906 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13907 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13908 \begin_inset Newline newline
13911 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13912 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13915 \begin_layout Standard
13916 To use custom character styles, open the
13918 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13920 \begin_inset space ~
13923 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13926 dialog or press the toolbar button
13929 arg "dialog-show character"
13933 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13934 font property that you can choose.
13935 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13938 \begin_inset space ~
13943 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13948 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13949 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13950 environments all at once.
13953 \begin_layout Standard
13954 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13957 \begin_inset space ~
13969 \begin_layout Labeling
13970 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13984 The possible options are:
13988 \begin_layout Labeling
13989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13994 This is the Roman font family.
13995 Normally a serif font.
13996 It's also the default family.
14006 \begin_layout Labeling
14007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14011 \begin_inset space ~
14018 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14030 \begin_layout Labeling
14031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14038 This is the Typewriter font family.
14044 arg "font-typewriter"
14053 \begin_layout Labeling
14054 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14059 This corresponds to the print weight.
14064 \begin_layout Labeling
14065 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14070 This is the Medium font series.
14071 It's also the default series.
14074 \begin_layout Labeling
14075 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14082 This is the Bold font series.
14095 \begin_layout Labeling
14096 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14101 As the name implies.
14106 \begin_layout Labeling
14107 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14112 This is the Upright font shape.
14113 It's also the default shape.
14116 \begin_layout Labeling
14117 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14131 s the Italic font shape
14137 \begin_layout Labeling
14138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14145 This is the Slanted font shape
14147 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14148 , this is different from italic).
14151 \begin_layout Labeling
14152 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14156 \begin_inset space ~
14163 This is the Small caps font shape
14170 \begin_layout Labeling
14171 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14176 Alters the text color.
14177 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14181 \begin_inset space ~
14186 , which means that the document default color set in
14188 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14189 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14195 \begin_inset space ~
14200 is used, you can choose between
14277 \begin_inset Index idx
14280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14289 \begin_layout Labeling
14290 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14295 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14296 the language of the document.
14297 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14298 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14300 \begin_inset Newline newline
14303 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14305 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14306 When using the spell checking (see section
14307 \begin_inset space ~
14311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14313 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14317 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14320 \begin_layout Labeling
14321 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14326 Alters the size of the font.
14327 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14328 proportional to the document font size.
14329 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14330 the details, but a general description of what
14336 \begin_layout Labeling
14337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14358 arg "font-size tiny"
14364 \begin_layout Labeling
14365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14386 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14392 \begin_layout Labeling
14393 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14414 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14420 \begin_layout Labeling
14421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14442 arg "font-size small"
14448 \begin_layout Labeling
14449 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14463 It's also the default size.
14467 arg "font-size normal"
14473 \begin_layout Labeling
14474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14495 arg "font-size large"
14501 \begin_layout Labeling
14502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14523 arg "font-size larger"
14529 \begin_layout Labeling
14530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14551 arg "font-size largest"
14557 \begin_layout Labeling
14558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14579 arg "font-size huge"
14585 \begin_layout Labeling
14586 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14607 arg "font-size giant"
14613 \begin_layout Labeling
14614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14619 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14639 arg "font-size increase"
14645 \begin_layout Labeling
14646 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14651 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14671 arg "font-size decrease"
14678 \begin_layout Standard
14683 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14684 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14686 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14687 — use those instead.
14688 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14691 \begin_layout Labeling
14692 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14697 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14702 \begin_layout Labeling
14703 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14710 This is text with emphasize on
14713 This might seem like the same as
14717 , but it is actually a bit different.
14723 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14725 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14728 \begin_layout Labeling
14729 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14736 This is text with Underbar on.
14742 arg "font-underline"
14748 \begin_inset Newline newline
14753 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14754 when you could not change fonts.
14755 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14756 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14757 because some people
14761 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14764 \begin_layout Labeling
14765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14769 \begin_inset space ~
14776 This is text with Double underbar on.
14782 arg "font-underunderline"
14786 \begin_inset Newline newline
14789 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14790 about double underbar.
14793 \begin_layout Labeling
14794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14798 \begin_inset space ~
14805 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14811 arg "font-underwave"
14815 \begin_inset Newline newline
14818 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14819 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14822 \begin_layout Labeling
14823 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14830 This is text with Strikeout on.
14836 arg "font-strikeout"
14840 \begin_inset Newline newline
14843 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14844 changed in the meantime.
14847 \begin_layout Labeling
14848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14855 This is text with Noun on.
14862 , this is a logical attribute.
14863 Normally it's equivalent to
14866 \begin_inset space ~
14875 \begin_layout Standard
14876 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14877 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14879 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14881 \begin_inset space ~
14884 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14890 arg "dialog-show character"
14893 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14894 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14897 arg "textstyle-apply"
14901 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14905 \begin_layout Standard
14906 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14913 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14914 (suppose you just set the shape to
14915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14933 \begin_inset space ~
14945 \begin_layout Standard
14946 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14954 \begin_inset space ~
14966 \begin_layout Itemize
14972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14979 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14997 \begin_inset Newline newline
15001 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15015 \begin_inset Note Note
15018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15019 For more on phantoms see section
15020 \begin_inset space ~
15024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15026 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15036 \begin_inset Newline newline
15042 \begin_layout Itemize
15047 fonts use characters with serifs.
15048 These are the small
15049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15056 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15057 The following example shows the difference:
15058 \begin_inset Newline newline
15062 \begin_inset Newline newline
15067 text without serifs
15070 \begin_inset Newline newline
15073 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15074 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15081 \begin_layout Itemize
15086 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15087 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15088 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15091 \begin_layout Standard
15092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15099 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15100 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15103 \begin_inset space ~
15108 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15109 the property to be removed.
15110 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15111 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15112 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15130 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15131 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15139 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15143 \begin_inset space ~
15148 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15159 If you, for example, set
15160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15178 \begin_inset space ~
15183 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15192 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15196 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15197 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15200 \begin_layout Section
15201 Printing and Previewing
15204 \begin_layout Subsection
15208 \begin_layout Standard
15209 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15210 using \SpecialChar LyX
15211 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15212 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15213 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15214 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15216 Additional Features
15221 \begin_layout Standard
15223 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15226 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15227 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15228 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15231 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15232 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15233 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15234 to turn your writing into printable output.
15235 This happens in two stages:
15238 \begin_layout Enumerate
15239 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15240 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15242 a file with the extension,
15243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15257 \begin_layout Enumerate
15258 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15259 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15260 to use the commands in the
15264 file to produce printable output.
15267 \begin_layout Subsection
15268 Output file formats
15269 \begin_inset Index idx
15272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15281 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15289 Simple text (ASCII)
15290 \begin_inset Index idx
15293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15294 File formats ! ASCII
15302 \begin_layout Standard
15303 This file type has the extension
15304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15316 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15320 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15327 \begin_layout Standard
15328 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15330 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15331 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15333 \begin_inset space ~
15339 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15340 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15341 bibliography (section
15342 \begin_inset space ~
15346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15348 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15353 If your document includes such material, use
15355 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15356 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15358 \begin_inset space ~
15362 \begin_inset space ~
15366 \begin_inset space ~
15374 \begin_inset space ~
15378 \begin_inset space ~
15384 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15385 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15391 \begin_inset Index idx
15394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15395 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15404 \begin_layout Standard
15405 This file type has the extension
15406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15417 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15420 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15421 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15422 -Errors or to process it manually
15423 with console commands.
15424 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15425 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15426 's temporary directory whenever you
15427 view or export your document.
15430 \begin_layout Standard
15431 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15432 -file using the menu
15434 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15435 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15439 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15440 export variants are explained in section
15441 \begin_inset space ~
15445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15447 reference "subsec:Export"
15454 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15456 \begin_inset Index idx
15459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15468 \begin_layout Standard
15469 This file type has the extension
15470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15490 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15491 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15492 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15496 \begin_layout Standard
15497 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15498 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15499 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15500 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15501 when you view the DVI.
15502 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15505 \begin_layout Standard
15506 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15508 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15509 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15514 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15515 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15517 \begin_inset space ~
15523 The latter option uses the program
15525 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15531 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15534 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15535 font access (see section
15536 \begin_inset space ~
15540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15542 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15547 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15548 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15553 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15555 \begin_inset Index idx
15558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15559 File formats ! PostScript
15567 \begin_layout Standard
15568 This file type has the extension
15569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15581 PostScript was developed by the company
15585 as a printer language.
15586 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15588 PostScript can be seen as a
15589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15592 programming language
15593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15596 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15601 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15608 \begin_inset Index idx
15611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15613 -packages ! pstricks
15623 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15626 \begin_layout Standard
15627 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15631 Encapsulated PostScript
15632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15635 (EPS, file extension
15636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15648 As \SpecialChar LyX
15649 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15650 convert them in the background to EPS.
15651 If, for example, you have 50
15652 \begin_inset space ~
15655 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15657 \begin_inset space ~
15660 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15661 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15663 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15664 EPS to avoid this problem.
15667 \begin_layout Standard
15668 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15670 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15671 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15677 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15679 \begin_inset Index idx
15682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15689 \begin_inset Index idx
15692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15701 \begin_layout Standard
15702 This file type has the extension
15703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15719 Portable Document Format
15720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15727 was derived from PostScript.
15728 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15737 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15738 looks exactly the same.
15741 \begin_layout Standard
15742 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15746 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 (JPG, file extension
15751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15778 Portable Network Graphics
15779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15782 (PNG, file extension
15783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15795 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15796 converts them in the
15797 background to one of these formats.
15798 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15799 will slow down your workflow.
15800 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15803 \begin_layout Standard
15804 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15806 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15812 \begin_layout Description
15814 \begin_inset space ~
15817 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15821 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15824 \begin_layout Description
15826 \begin_inset space ~
15833 ) This uses the program
15835 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15838 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15841 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15844 is a new engine, derived from
15848 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15849 access (see section
15850 \begin_inset space ~
15854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15856 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15861 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15862 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15867 \begin_layout Description
15869 \begin_inset space ~
15876 ) This uses the program
15881 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15887 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15888 font access (see section
15889 \begin_inset space ~
15893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15895 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15900 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15901 vertically written Japanese.
15904 \begin_layout Description
15906 \begin_inset space ~
15909 (cropped) This is the same as
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15917 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15918 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15919 to generate good-looking
15920 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15923 \begin_layout Description
15925 \begin_inset space ~
15928 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15932 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15936 \begin_layout Description
15938 \begin_inset space ~
15941 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15945 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15946 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15950 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15951 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15954 \begin_layout Standard
15958 \begin_inset space ~
15967 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15968 works without problems.
15969 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15970 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15974 \begin_inset space ~
15982 \begin_inset space ~
15987 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15995 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15997 \begin_inset Index idx
16000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16001 FileFormats ! XHTML
16007 \begin_inset Index idx
16010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16019 \begin_layout Standard
16020 This file type has the extension
16021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16033 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16034 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16035 When \SpecialChar LyX
16036 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16037 suitable for the purpose.
16038 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16040 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16041 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16044 between different formats, which are described in section
16046 Math Output in XHTML
16051 \begin_inset space ~
16059 \begin_layout Standard
16060 XHTML output remains
16061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16068 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16069 features are supported yet.
16073 and the World Wide Web
16077 Additional Features
16079 manual, for more information.
16082 \begin_layout Standard
16083 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16085 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16086 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16092 \begin_layout Subsection
16094 \begin_inset Index idx
16097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16106 \begin_layout Standard
16107 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16108 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16117 or use the toolbar button
16124 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16125 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16126 \begin_inset space ~
16130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16132 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16136 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16138 \begin_inset space ~
16142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16144 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16149 Further output formats can be selected via
16151 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16152 View (Other Formats)
16154 or the toolbar button
16163 \begin_layout Standard
16164 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16165 viewer window using the menu
16167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16173 Update (Other Formats)
16178 \begin_layout Standard
16179 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16182 To have a real output, export your document.
16185 \begin_layout Section
16186 A few Words about Typography
16187 \begin_inset Index idx
16190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16199 \begin_layout Subsection
16200 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16201 \begin_inset Index idx
16204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16211 \begin_inset Index idx
16214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16223 \begin_layout Standard
16224 In \SpecialChar LyX
16226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16237 character comes in four lengths: the
16249 , and the minus sign:
16250 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16256 \begin_layout Standard
16257 \begin_inset Tabular
16258 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16259 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16260 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16261 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16262 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16263 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16332 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16359 \begin_inset space ~
16362 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16369 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16396 \begin_inset space ~
16399 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16420 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16454 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16460 \begin_layout Standard
16461 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16473 character multiple times in a row.
16474 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16475 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16508 \begin_layout Standard
16509 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16510 math mode and has a length of its own.
16511 Here are some examples:
16514 \begin_layout Enumerate
16515 line- and page-breaks
16516 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16526 \begin_layout Enumerate
16528 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16538 \begin_layout Enumerate
16539 Oh — there's a dash.
16540 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16550 \begin_layout Enumerate
16551 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16555 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16565 \begin_layout Subsection
16567 \begin_inset Index idx
16570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16579 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16586 \begin_layout Standard
16587 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16588 but automatically in the output.
16589 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16595 \begin_inset Index idx
16598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16605 following the rules of the document language.
16608 \begin_layout Standard
16610 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16614 font and with unusual constructs, like
16615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16623 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16624 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16625 This is done with the menu
16627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16628 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16630 \begin_inset space ~
16636 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16638 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16642 \begin_layout Standard
16643 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16644 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16655 would then see the hyphen
16656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16663 as a hyphenation possibility.
16664 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16665 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16666 as described in section
16668 Prevent Hyphenation
16673 \begin_inset space ~
16681 \begin_layout Subsection
16683 \begin_inset Index idx
16686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16696 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16699 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16706 \begin_layout Standard
16707 When \SpecialChar LyX
16708 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16709 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16711 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16717 appropriate amount of space.
16718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16721 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16723 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16724 gets after another word.
16727 \begin_layout Standard
16728 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16729 not work in all cases.
16731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16742 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16743 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16746 \begin_layout Standard
16747 Here are some examples of
16751 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16754 \begin_layout Itemize
16759 \begin_layout Itemize
16764 \begin_layout Standard
16765 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16768 \begin_layout Itemize
16770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16774 this is too much space!
16777 \begin_layout Itemize
16782 \begin_layout Standard
16783 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16786 \begin_layout Standard
16787 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16790 \begin_layout Enumerate
16794 \begin_inset space ~
16799 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16800 \begin_inset space ~
16804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16806 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16811 \begin_inset Index idx
16814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16815 Spaces ! inter-word
16823 \begin_layout Enumerate
16827 \begin_inset space ~
16832 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16833 \begin_inset space ~
16837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16839 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16844 \begin_inset Index idx
16847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16856 \begin_layout Enumerate
16860 \begin_inset space ~
16864 \begin_inset space ~
16868 \begin_inset space ~
16875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16877 \begin_inset space ~
16882 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16883 This function is also bound to
16886 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16892 \begin_layout Standard
16893 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16896 \begin_layout Itemize
16898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16902 \begin_inset space \space{}
16905 this is too much space!
16908 \begin_layout Itemize
16909 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16913 \begin_layout Standard
16914 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16915 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16917 will take care of this.
16920 \begin_layout Standard
16921 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16925 \begin_inset space ~
16931 feature described in the section
16933 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16938 Additional Features
16943 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16945 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16947 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16951 \begin_inset Index idx
16954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16956 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16958 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16967 \begin_inset Index idx
16970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16972 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16974 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17007 \begin_layout Standard
17010 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
17012 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
17016 Specifically, it will
17017 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17019 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17023 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17025 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17028 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17029 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17031 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17044 The keyboard character,
17048 , generates this automatically.
17051 \begin_layout Standard
17052 You can specify what character the
17057 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17061 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17070 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17074 \begin_inset Index idx
17077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17078 Document ! Settings
17084 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17086 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17092 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17095 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17096 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17100 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17102 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756786
17108 \begin_layout Labeling
17109 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17112 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17123 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17133 \begin_inset space ~
17137 \begin_inset space ~
17141 \begin_inset Quotes els
17145 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17153 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17155 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17163 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17165 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17169 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17177 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17179 \begin_inset Quotes els
17183 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17186 quotation marks (as common, e.
17187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17195 \begin_layout Labeling
17196 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17198 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17201 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17205 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17209 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17211 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17215 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17219 \begin_inset space ~
17223 \begin_inset space ~
17227 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17231 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17239 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17240 Use quotes like ”this”
17241 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17243 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17247 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17251 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17255 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17258 quotation marks (as common, e.
17259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17267 \begin_layout Labeling
17268 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17270 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17273 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17277 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17281 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17283 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17287 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17291 \begin_inset space ~
17295 \begin_inset space ~
17299 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17303 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17311 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17313 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17317 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17321 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17323 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17327 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17331 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17335 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17338 quotation marks (as common, e.
17339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17347 \begin_layout Labeling
17348 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17350 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17353 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17357 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17361 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17363 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17367 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17371 \begin_inset space ~
17375 \begin_inset space ~
17379 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17383 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17391 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17393 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17397 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17401 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17403 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17407 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17411 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17415 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17418 quotation marks (as common, e.
17419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17427 \begin_layout Labeling
17428 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17430 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17433 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17437 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17441 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17443 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17447 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17451 \begin_inset space ~
17455 \begin_inset space ~
17459 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17463 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17471 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17473 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17477 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17481 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17483 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17487 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17491 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17495 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17498 quotation marks (as common, e.
17499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17502 g., in Switzerland)
17507 \begin_layout Labeling
17508 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17510 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17513 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17517 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17521 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17523 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17527 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17531 \begin_inset space ~
17535 \begin_inset space ~
17539 \begin_inset Quotes als
17543 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17551 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17553 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17557 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17561 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17563 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17567 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17571 \begin_inset Quotes als
17575 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17578 quotation marks (as common, e.
17579 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17585 \begin_layout Labeling
17586 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17588 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17591 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17595 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17599 \begin_inset space ~
17603 \begin_inset space ~
17607 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17611 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17617 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17621 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17625 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17629 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17632 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17635 \begin_layout Labeling
17636 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17638 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17641 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17645 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17649 \begin_inset space ~
17653 \begin_inset space ~
17657 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17661 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17667 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17671 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17675 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17679 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17682 quotation marks (as common, e.
17683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17686 g., in Great Britain)
17689 \begin_layout Labeling
17690 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17692 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17695 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17699 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17703 \begin_inset space ~
17707 \begin_inset space ~
17711 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17715 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17721 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17725 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17729 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17733 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17736 quotation marks (as common, e.
17737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17743 \begin_layout Labeling
17744 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17746 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17749 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17753 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17757 \begin_inset space ~
17761 \begin_inset space ~
17765 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17769 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17775 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17779 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17783 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17787 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17790 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17796 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17797 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17798 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17799 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17800 the inner marks differ).
17810 \begin_layout Labeling
17811 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17813 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17816 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17820 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17824 \begin_inset space ~
17828 \begin_inset space ~
17832 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17836 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17842 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17846 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17850 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17854 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17857 quotation marks (as common, e.
17858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17864 \begin_layout Labeling
17865 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17867 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756796
17870 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17874 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17878 \begin_inset space ~
17882 \begin_inset space ~
17886 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17890 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17896 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17900 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17904 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17908 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17911 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17914 \begin_layout Labeling
17915 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17917 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757086
17918 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17926 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17932 \begin_inset space ~
17936 \begin_inset space ~
17942 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17950 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17954 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17958 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17962 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17966 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17969 quotation marks (as common, e.
17970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17979 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757158
17980 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17981 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17991 \begin_layout Labeling
17992 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17994 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
17995 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18003 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18009 \begin_inset space ~
18013 \begin_inset space ~
18019 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18027 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18031 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18035 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18039 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18043 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18046 quotation marks (as common, e.
18047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18050 g., in North Korea and China)
18054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18056 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18057 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18058 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18068 \begin_layout Standard
18070 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
18072 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
18076 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
18078 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
18083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18085 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
18086 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18087 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18088 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18096 does not necessarily mean
18097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18105 This is why we call them
18106 \begin_inset Quotes els
18110 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18131 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
18132 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18134 \begin_inset Quotes els
18138 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18142 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
18144 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
18145 can be obtained by means of
18150 arg "quote-insert single"
18154 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
18157 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18163 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18167 \begin_layout Standard
18169 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18170 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18171 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18172 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18173 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18174 If you check the setting
18176 Use dynamic quotation marks
18180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18181 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18184 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18185 they appear in a special color).
18186 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18187 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18192 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18195 \begin_layout Standard
18197 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18198 Individual quotation marks (i.
18199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18202 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18203 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18209 \begin_layout Subsection
18211 \begin_inset Index idx
18214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18215 Typography ! Ligatures
18221 \begin_inset Index idx
18224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18255 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18262 \begin_layout Standard
18263 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18264 print them as single characters.
18265 These groups are known as
18270 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18271 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18273 Here are the standard ligatures:
18276 \begin_layout Itemize
18280 \begin_layout Itemize
18284 \begin_layout Itemize
18288 \begin_layout Itemize
18292 \begin_layout Itemize
18296 \begin_layout Standard
18297 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18300 \begin_layout Standard
18301 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18302 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18310 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18326 To break a ligature, use
18328 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18329 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18331 \begin_inset space ~
18338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18349 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18366 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18374 \begin_layout Subsection
18376 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18378 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18380 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18384 \begin_inset Index idx
18387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18397 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18404 \begin_layout Standard
18407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18408 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18412 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18415 \begin_layout Description
18417 The name of the game.
18420 \begin_layout Description
18422 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18426 \begin_layout Description
18428 The \SpecialChar TeX
18429 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18433 \begin_layout Description
18434 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18435 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18439 \begin_layout Standard
18440 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18446 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18454 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18455 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18456 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18457 converges to the number
18458 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18461 : The actual version is
18462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18470 , the previous one was
18471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18482 \begin_layout Subsection
18484 \begin_inset Index idx
18487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 \begin_layout Standard
18497 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18498 space between two words.
18499 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18509 for units use the menu
18511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18512 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18514 \begin_inset space ~
18522 arg "space-insert thin"
18528 \begin_layout Standard
18529 Here is an example to show the differences:
18532 \begin_layout Standard
18533 \begin_inset Tabular
18534 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18535 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18536 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18537 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18544 \begin_inset space ~
18548 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18560 space between number and unit
18567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18576 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18588 half space between number and unit
18601 \begin_layout Subsection
18603 \begin_inset Index idx
18606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18607 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18615 \begin_layout Standard
18616 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18618 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18619 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18620 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18621 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18622 These bits of text became known as
18633 \begin_layout Standard
18634 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18635 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18636 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18637 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18638 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18639 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18640 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18641 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18642 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18643 \begin_inset Newline newline
18651 \begin_inset Newline newline
18659 \begin_inset Newline newline
18662 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18663 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18664 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18666 \begin_inset space ~
18670 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18672 key "latexcompanion"
18678 \begin_inset space ~
18682 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18689 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18690 's page break mechanism.
18693 \begin_layout Chapter
18694 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18695 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18697 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18704 \begin_layout Standard
18705 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18714 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18717 \begin_layout Section
18719 \begin_inset Index idx
18722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18738 \begin_layout Standard
18740 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18743 \begin_layout Description
18746 \begin_inset space ~
18749 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18750 \begin_inset Newline newline
18754 \begin_inset Note Note
18757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18758 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18766 \begin_layout Description
18767 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18768 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18769 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18772 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18773 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18775 \begin_inset space ~
18781 \begin_inset Newline newline
18785 \begin_inset Note Comment
18788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18789 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18798 \begin_layout Description
18800 \begin_inset space ~
18803 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18804 set in the document settings under
18806 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18808 \begin_inset space ~
18814 \begin_inset Newline newline
18818 \begin_inset Newline newline
18822 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18832 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18837 of a comment that appears in the output.
18843 \begin_inset Newline newline
18847 \begin_inset Newline newline
18850 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18853 \begin_layout Standard
18854 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18866 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18869 \begin_layout Section
18871 \begin_inset Index idx
18874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18883 name "sec:Footnotes"
18890 \begin_layout Standard
18892 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18895 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18898 or the toolbar button
18901 arg "footnote-insert"
18913 \begin_inset Graphics
18914 filename clipart/footnote.png
18923 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18924 's representation of your footnote.
18934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18953 label, the box will
18957 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18958 Clicking on the box label again will close
18971 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18972 and click on the footnote
18987 \begin_layout Standard
18988 Here is an example footnote:
18996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18997 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19005 \begin_layout Standard
19006 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19007 position where the footnote box is placed.
19008 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19009 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19010 according to the document class.
19012 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19013 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19019 ey are described in the
19022 \begin_inset space ~
19030 \begin_layout Section
19032 \begin_inset Index idx
19035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19044 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19051 \begin_layout Standard
19052 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19054 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19058 \begin_inset space ~
19063 or the toolbar button
19066 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19092 appearing within your text.
19093 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19094 's representation of your margin
19103 \begin_layout Standard
19104 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19108 \begin_inset Marginal
19111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19113 This is a marginal note.
19121 \begin_layout Standard
19122 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19123 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19124 pages, right on odd pages.
19127 \begin_layout Standard
19128 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19131 \begin_inset space ~
19139 \begin_inset space ~
19147 \begin_layout Section
19148 Graphics and Images
19149 \begin_inset Index idx
19152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19159 \begin_inset Index idx
19162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19171 name "sec:Graphics"
19178 \begin_layout Standard
19179 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19180 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19183 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19188 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19192 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19195 \begin_layout Standard
19196 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19201 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19202 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19204 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19205 \begin_inset space ~
19209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19211 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19218 \begin_layout Standard
19223 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19224 of the image in the output.
19225 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19233 \begin_inset space ~
19242 \begin_inset space ~
19246 \begin_inset space ~
19250 \begin_inset space ~
19255 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19256 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19264 \begin_layout Standard
19268 \begin_inset space ~
19272 \begin_inset space ~
19277 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19278 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19280 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19285 \begin_inset space ~
19290 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19291 with the image size is printed.
19294 \begin_layout Standard
19295 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19296 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19298 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19301 \begin_layout Standard
19303 \begin_inset Graphics
19304 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19312 \begin_layout Standard
19313 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19314 the image into a float, see section
19315 \begin_inset space ~
19319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19321 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19328 \begin_layout Subsection
19330 \begin_inset Index idx
19333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19342 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19349 \begin_layout Standard
19350 You can insert images in any known file format.
19351 But as we explained in section
19352 \begin_inset space ~
19356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19358 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19362 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19364 therefore uses the program
19368 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19369 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19370 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19371 \begin_inset space ~
19375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19377 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19384 \begin_layout Standard
19385 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19388 \begin_layout Description
19390 \begin_inset space ~
19393 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19394 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19395 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19399 Graphics Interchange Format
19400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19403 (GIF, file extension
19404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19416 \begin_inset Index idx
19419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19451 Portable Network Graphics
19452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19455 (PNG, file extension
19456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19468 \begin_inset Index idx
19471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19503 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19507 (JPG, file extension
19508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19532 \begin_inset Index idx
19535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19566 \begin_layout Description
19568 \begin_inset space ~
19571 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19573 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19574 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19575 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19576 \begin_inset Newline newline
19579 Scalable image formats can be
19580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19583 Scalable Vector Graphics
19584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19587 (SVG, file extension
19588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19600 \begin_inset Index idx
19603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19635 Encapsulated PostScript
19636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19639 (EPS, file extension
19640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19652 \begin_inset Index idx
19655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19687 Portable Document Format
19688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19691 (PDF, file extension
19692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19704 \begin_inset Index idx
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19722 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19723 result will not be scalable.
19724 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19730 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19738 \begin_layout Standard
19739 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19746 \begin_layout Subsection
19747 Grouping of Image Settings
19748 \begin_inset Index idx
19751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19752 Images ! Settings grouping
19760 \begin_layout Standard
19761 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19763 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19764 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19766 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19767 need to manually change each of them.
19771 \begin_layout Standard
19772 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19775 \begin_inset space ~
19779 \begin_inset space ~
19791 \begin_inset space ~
19795 \begin_inset space ~
19801 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19802 and checking the name of the desired group.
19805 \begin_layout Section
19807 \begin_inset Index idx
19810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19826 \begin_layout Standard
19827 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19830 arg "tabular-insert"
19835 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19839 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19840 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19841 from the rest of the table.
19842 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19843 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19845 Here is an example table:
19848 \begin_layout Standard
19850 \begin_inset Tabular
19851 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19852 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19853 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19854 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19855 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20056 \begin_layout Subsection
20060 \begin_layout Standard
20061 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20064 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20068 This brings up the table dialog.
20069 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20070 cursor is placed currently.
20071 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20072 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20073 done on all of your selection.
20076 \begin_layout Standard
20077 In addition to the table dialog, the
20080 \begin_inset space ~
20085 helps you in setting table properties.
20086 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20089 \begin_layout Standard
20093 \begin_inset space ~
20098 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20099 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20100 current cell respectively.
20101 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20103 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20104 of text, see section
20105 \begin_inset space ~
20109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20111 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20118 \begin_layout Standard
20119 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20120 using the check box
20129 This will merge the cells to
20133 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20134 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20135 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20136 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20137 in the last row without the upper border:
20140 \begin_layout Standard
20142 \begin_inset Tabular
20143 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20144 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20146 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20147 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20148 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20279 \begin_layout Standard
20280 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20281 -arguments for the table.
20282 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20283 explained in the chapter
20290 \begin_inset space ~
20296 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20297 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20298 but are visible in the output.
20301 \begin_layout Standard
20302 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20310 Most DVI-viewers are
20314 able to display rotations.
20322 \begin_layout Standard
20327 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20332 adds lines for all cell borders.
20335 \begin_layout Subsection
20337 \begin_inset Index idx
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20341 Tables ! Multi-page
20347 \begin_inset Index idx
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20359 \begin_layout Standard
20360 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20363 \begin_inset space ~
20367 \begin_inset space ~
20375 \begin_inset space ~
20380 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20381 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20384 \begin_layout Description
20389 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20390 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20391 Except for the first page, if
20394 \begin_inset space ~
20402 \begin_layout Description
20406 \begin_inset space ~
20411 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20412 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20415 \begin_layout Description
20420 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20421 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20422 except for the last page, if
20425 \begin_inset space ~
20433 \begin_layout Description
20437 \begin_inset space ~
20442 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20443 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20446 \begin_layout Description
20447 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20448 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20450 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20454 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20457 \begin_inset space ~
20465 \begin_layout Standard
20466 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20467 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20468 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20474 In this context, first means first in this order:
20477 \begin_inset space ~
20489 \begin_inset space ~
20494 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20497 \begin_layout Standard
20499 \begin_inset Tabular
20500 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20501 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20502 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20503 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20504 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20505 <row endfirsthead="true">
20506 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20517 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20526 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20536 <row endfirsthead="true">
20537 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20548 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20557 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20569 <row endhead="true">
20570 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20600 <row endhead="true">
20601 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20612 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <row endfoot="true">
20634 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20645 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20654 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20685 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21626 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21635 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21644 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21655 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21748 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21779 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21810 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21841 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21872 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21903 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21934 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21965 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21996 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22027 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22058 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22089 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22120 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22151 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22213 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22244 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22306 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22337 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22368 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22399 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22554 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22585 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22615 <row endlastfoot="true">
22616 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22627 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22636 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22653 \begin_layout Subsection
22655 \begin_inset Index idx
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22667 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22674 \begin_layout Standard
22675 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22676 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22677 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22678 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22682 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22685 \begin_layout Standard
22686 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22687 for the column in the table dialog.
22688 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22689 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22693 \begin_layout Standard
22695 \begin_inset Tabular
22696 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22697 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22698 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22699 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22700 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22720 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22845 This is longer now.
22850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22901 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22902 This is longer now.
22907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 \begin_layout Standard
22934 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22935 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22940 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22941 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22947 Selection with the mouse or with
22951 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22952 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22953 the selection from outside the table.
22956 \begin_layout Section
22958 \begin_inset Index idx
22961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22977 \begin_layout Subsection
22981 \begin_layout Standard
22982 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22983 have a fixed location.
22985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22992 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23000 \begin_inset space ~
23005 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23006 too many notes on the current page.
23009 \begin_layout Standard
23010 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23011 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23012 and pages without text.
23013 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23014 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23015 Floats are therefore numbered.
23016 Referencing is described in section
23017 \begin_inset space ~
23021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23023 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23030 \begin_layout Standard
23031 To insert a float, use the menu
23033 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23037 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23038 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23040 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23041 \begin_inset Index idx
23044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23050 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23051 paragraph within the float.
23052 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23053 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23054 left-clicking on the box label.
23055 A closed float box looks like this:
23056 \begin_inset Graphics
23057 filename clipart/float.png
23062 – a gray button with a red label.
23065 \begin_layout Standard
23066 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23068 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23071 \begin_layout Subsection
23073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23075 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23080 \begin_inset Index idx
23083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23084 Floats ! Figure floats
23092 \begin_layout Standard
23094 \begin_inset space ~
23098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23100 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23104 was created using the menu
23106 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23107 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23113 arg "float-insert figure"
23117 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23126 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23130 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23131 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23133 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23135 \begin_inset space ~
23143 arg "layout-paragraph"
23149 \begin_layout Standard
23150 \begin_inset Float figure
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23157 \begin_inset Graphics
23158 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23168 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23173 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23177 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23190 \begin_layout Standard
23191 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23192 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23203 ) and refer to it using the menu
23205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23211 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23215 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23216 vague references like
23217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23224 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23225 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23235 For more about cross-references, see section
23236 \begin_inset space ~
23240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23242 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23249 \begin_layout Standard
23250 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23251 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23252 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23253 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23254 as described in section
23255 \begin_inset space ~
23259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23261 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23267 \begin_inset space ~
23271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23273 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23277 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23278 You can also set the images one below the other.
23280 \begin_inset space ~
23284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23286 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23293 reference "fig:Platypus"
23297 are the subfigures.
23300 \begin_layout Standard
23301 \begin_inset Float figure
23306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23307 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23311 \begin_inset Float figure
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23317 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23322 name "fig:Undefinable"
23334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23335 \begin_inset Graphics
23336 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23347 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23351 \begin_inset Float figure
23356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23357 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23362 name "fig:Platypus"
23374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23375 \begin_inset Graphics
23376 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23388 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23395 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23400 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23404 Two distorted images.
23417 \begin_layout Subsection
23419 \begin_inset Index idx
23422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 Floats ! Table floats
23431 \begin_layout Standard
23432 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23434 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23435 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23438 or the toolbar button
23441 arg "float-insert table"
23445 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23446 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23447 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23449 \begin_inset space ~
23453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23455 reference "tab:Table-float"
23462 \begin_layout Standard
23463 \begin_inset Float table
23468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23474 name "tab:Table-float"
23486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23488 \begin_inset Tabular
23489 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23490 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23491 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23492 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23493 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23620 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23641 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23644 \end{array}\right]$
23652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23665 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23686 \begin_layout Subsection
23688 \begin_inset Index idx
23691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23700 \begin_layout Standard
23702 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23703 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23704 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23706 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23714 \begin_inset space ~
23722 \begin_layout Section
23724 \begin_inset Index idx
23727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23736 \begin_layout Standard
23738 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23740 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23741 \begin_inset space \space{}
23748 \begin_layout Standard
23749 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23750 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23756 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23757 and its alignment within the page.
23760 \begin_layout Standard
23762 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23772 height_special "totalheight"
23777 backgroundcolor "none"
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 This is a minipage.
23784 The text is set in an italic style.
23787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23791 another formatting.
23799 \begin_layout Standard
23800 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23803 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23807 as described in section
23808 \begin_inset space ~
23812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23814 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23819 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23825 \begin_layout Standard
23826 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23836 height_special "totalheight"
23841 backgroundcolor "none"
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23845 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23846 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23852 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23856 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23866 height_special "totalheight"
23871 backgroundcolor "none"
23874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23875 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23876 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23884 \begin_layout Standard
23885 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23891 \begin_layout Standard
23892 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23894 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23901 \begin_inset space ~
23909 \begin_layout Chapter
23910 Mathematical Formulas
23911 \begin_inset Index idx
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 \begin_inset Index idx
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23955 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23962 \begin_layout Standard
23963 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23968 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23971 \begin_layout Section
23973 \begin_inset Index idx
23976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 \begin_layout Standard
23986 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23999 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24001 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24002 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24003 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24011 \begin_layout Standard
24012 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24016 \begin_inset space ~
24021 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24024 \begin_layout Standard
24025 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24026 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24029 \begin_layout Standard
24030 This is a line with an inline formula
24031 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24037 \begin_layout Standard
24038 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24039 paragraph, like this one:
24040 \begin_inset Formula
24047 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24050 \begin_layout Standard
24052 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24054 For example, typing
24055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24068 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24069 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24073 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24076 \begin_inset space ~
24084 \begin_layout Subsection
24085 Navigating in Formulas
24086 \begin_inset Index idx
24089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 \begin_layout Standard
24099 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24100 achieved with the arrow keys.
24102 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24103 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24108 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24109 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24113 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24117 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24120 \end{array}\right]$
24128 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24133 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24134 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24137 \begin_layout Standard
24142 , printed in this document as
24143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24147 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24154 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24155 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24156 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24161 For example, if you want
24162 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24170 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24180 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24184 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24189 , since in the latter case only the
24192 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24197 will be under the square root sign:
24198 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24204 \begin_layout Standard
24205 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24207 \begin_inset Formula
24209 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24218 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24219 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24222 \begin_layout Subsection
24226 \begin_layout Standard
24227 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24228 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24232 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24233 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24234 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24235 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24236 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24240 \begin_layout Subsection
24241 Exponents and Subscripts
24242 \begin_inset Index idx
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24252 \begin_inset Index idx
24255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24264 \begin_layout Standard
24265 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24268 arg "math-superscript"
24274 arg "math-subscript"
24277 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24279 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24282 , type in a formula
24285 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24295 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24301 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24305 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24311 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24317 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24326 , you have to use an extra
24330 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24331 For example, if you want
24332 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24338 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24344 Subscripts are similar: To get
24345 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24351 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24359 \begin_layout Subsection
24361 \begin_inset Index idx
24364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24373 \begin_layout Standard
24374 Create a fraction either with the command
24380 or by using the icon
24383 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24389 \begin_inset space ~
24395 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24396 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24397 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24402 To move back up, press
24407 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24408 \begin_inset Formula
24410 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24413 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24421 \begin_layout Subsection
24423 \begin_inset Index idx
24426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24435 \begin_layout Standard
24436 Roots can be created using the
24439 \begin_inset space ~
24447 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24453 arg "math-insert \\root"
24475 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24481 always produces a square root.
24484 \begin_layout Subsection
24485 Operators with Limits
24486 \begin_inset Index idx
24489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24496 \begin_inset Index idx
24499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24508 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24515 \begin_layout Standard
24517 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24521 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24524 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24525 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24526 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24527 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24528 The sum operator will automatically place its
24529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24536 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24538 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24542 \begin_inset Formula
24544 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24549 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24553 \begin_layout Standard
24554 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24556 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24557 behind the operator and using the menu
24559 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24560 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24562 \begin_inset space ~
24566 \begin_inset space ~
24580 \begin_layout Standard
24581 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24590 \begin_inset Index idx
24593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24600 \begin_inset Formula
24602 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24607 which will place the
24608 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24620 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24621 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24627 \begin_layout Standard
24628 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24635 Have a look at section
24636 \begin_inset space ~
24640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24642 reference "subsec:Functions"
24646 for an explanation of function macros.
24649 \begin_layout Subsection
24651 \begin_inset Index idx
24654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24663 \begin_layout Standard
24664 Most math symbols can be found in the
24667 \begin_inset space ~
24672 under one of several categories; including
24689 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24693 \begin_layout Standard
24694 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24695 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24696 don't have to use the
24699 \begin_inset space ~
24704 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24706 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24709 \begin_layout Subsection
24711 \begin_inset Index idx
24714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24723 \begin_layout Standard
24724 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24730 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24736 \begin_inset space ~
24744 arg "math-insert \\space"
24748 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24749 For example, the sequence
24754 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24757 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24759 \begin_inset Graphics
24760 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24765 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24766 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24767 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24768 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24769 , because they are negative
24771 Here are two examples:
24774 \begin_layout Standard
24784 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24790 \begin_layout Standard
24800 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24806 \begin_layout Subsection
24808 \begin_inset Index idx
24811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24820 name "subsec:Functions"
24827 \begin_layout Standard
24831 \begin_inset space ~
24836 contains under the button
24839 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24842 a number of function macros, such as
24843 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24847 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24855 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24862 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24863 avoid confusions, because
24864 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24868 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24874 \begin_layout Standard
24875 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24877 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24881 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24887 \begin_layout Standard
24888 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24889 are placed, as described in section
24890 \begin_inset space ~
24894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24896 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24903 \begin_layout Subsection
24905 \begin_inset Index idx
24908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24917 \begin_layout Standard
24918 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24920 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24921 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24922 commands, for example, to enter
24923 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24926 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24927 Our example is entered by typing
24932 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24939 \begin_inset space ~
24943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24945 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24949 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24952 \begin_layout Standard
24953 \begin_inset Float table
24958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24964 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24968 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24978 \begin_inset Tabular
24979 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24980 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24981 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24982 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24983 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25067 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25121 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25175 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25229 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25283 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25337 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25445 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25499 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25544 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25565 \begin_layout Standard
25566 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25569 \begin_inset space ~
25577 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25580 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25584 \begin_layout Section
25585 Brackets and Delimiters
25586 \begin_inset Index idx
25589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25596 \begin_inset Index idx
25599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25608 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25615 \begin_layout Standard
25616 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25618 For some purposes, using just the keys
25623 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25624 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25625 toolbar delimiter icon
25628 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25632 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25633 \begin_inset Formula
25635 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25643 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25644 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25648 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25651 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25657 \begin_inset Formula
25659 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25667 \begin_layout Standard
25668 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25669 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25673 \begin_layout Standard
25674 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25675 left side and right side.
25676 If you use the option
25679 \begin_inset space ~
25684 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25685 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25687 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25692 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25693 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25696 \begin_layout Standard
25697 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25698 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25699 is to go inside the brackets.
25700 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25705 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25706 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25707 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25711 arg "math-delim ( )"
25717 \begin_layout Section
25718 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25719 \begin_inset Index idx
25722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25729 \begin_inset Index idx
25732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25739 \begin_inset Index idx
25742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25743 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25751 \begin_layout Standard
25752 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25756 \begin_inset space ~
25764 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25768 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25769 Here is an example:
25770 \begin_inset Formula
25772 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25781 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25782 \begin_inset space ~
25786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25788 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25793 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25794 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25795 This alignment is set in the box
25800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25849 for every column as default.
25850 For example, the sequence
25851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25862 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25863 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25864 corresponds to the relevant column.
25865 The result will look like this:
25866 \begin_inset Formula
25869 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25870 column & has & has\,right\\
25871 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25880 \begin_layout Standard
25881 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25884 arg "newline-insert newline"
25887 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25888 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25890 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25893 or the math toolbar.
25896 \begin_layout Standard
25897 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25898 It can be created with the menu
25900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25901 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25903 \begin_inset space ~
25915 Here is an example:
25916 \begin_inset Formula
25930 \begin_layout Standard
25931 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25934 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25937 arg "newline-insert newline"
25941 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25946 arg "newline-insert newline"
25949 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25957 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25958 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25959 A new row is created by every further entry of
25962 arg "newline-insert newline"
25966 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25967 Here is an example:
25968 \begin_inset Formula
25970 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25971 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25976 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25977 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25978 \begin_inset Formula
25980 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25988 \begin_layout Standard
25989 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25996 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25997 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26000 reference "eq:asquared"
26005 The other types are described in section
26006 \begin_inset space ~
26010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26012 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26019 \begin_layout Section
26020 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26021 \begin_inset Index idx
26024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26025 Math ! Formula numbering
26031 \begin_inset Index idx
26034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26035 Math ! Referencing formulas
26041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26043 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26050 \begin_layout Standard
26051 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26053 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26054 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26056 \begin_inset space ~
26060 \begin_inset space ~
26068 arg "math-number-toggle"
26072 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26073 within parentheses.
26074 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26075 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26076 the document class.
26077 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26078 separated by a dot:
26079 \begin_inset Formula
26089 arg "math-number-toggle"
26092 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26093 You can only number displayed formulas.
26096 \begin_layout Standard
26097 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26099 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26100 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26102 \begin_inset space ~
26106 \begin_inset space ~
26114 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26117 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26118 \begin_inset Formula
26121 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26127 To number all lines use the shortcut
26130 arg "math-number-toggle"
26136 \begin_layout Standard
26137 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26140 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26141 A label is inserted with the menu
26143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26152 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26153 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26154 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26166 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26167 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26168 We inserted in the following example the label
26169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26176 in the second line:
26177 \begin_inset Formula
26179 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26180 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26185 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26186 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26187 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26189 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26191 \begin_inset space ~
26199 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26203 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26204 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26205 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26206 as the formula number:
26209 \begin_layout Standard
26210 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26213 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26220 \begin_layout Standard
26221 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26222 's cross-reference box are described in section
26223 \begin_inset space ~
26227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26229 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26234 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26242 \begin_layout Section
26243 User defined math macros
26244 \begin_inset Index idx
26247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26256 \begin_layout Standard
26258 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26259 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26260 Math macros are explained in section
26263 \begin_inset space ~
26275 \begin_layout Section
26279 \begin_layout Subsection
26281 \begin_inset Index idx
26284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26293 \begin_layout Standard
26294 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26295 To set a font in a formula, use the
26298 \begin_inset space ~
26306 arg "math-insert \\font"
26309 , or enter its command, listed in table
26310 \begin_inset space ~
26314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26316 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26323 \begin_layout Standard
26324 \begin_inset Float table
26329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26330 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26335 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26339 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26349 \begin_inset Tabular
26350 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26351 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26353 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26385 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26412 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26439 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26472 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26499 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26526 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26560 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26587 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26621 \begin_layout Standard
26622 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26630 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26646 \begin_layout Standard
26647 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26648 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26653 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26654 space when you need a space in the box.
26655 Here is an example where
26656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26667 denotes the set of numbers:
26668 \begin_inset Formula
26670 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26678 \begin_layout Standard
26679 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26680 You can, for example, put a character in
26689 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26693 \begin_inset Newline newline
26696 So it is better not to use this feature.
26699 \begin_layout Standard
26700 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26701 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26705 \begin_inset Newline newline
26708 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26714 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26715 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26721 \begin_layout Standard
26728 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26731 \begin_layout Standard
26732 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26734 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26735 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26737 \begin_inset space ~
26745 \begin_layout Subsection
26747 \begin_inset Index idx
26750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26759 \begin_layout Standard
26760 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26762 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26766 \begin_inset space ~
26770 \begin_inset space ~
26778 \begin_inset space ~
26786 arg "math-insert \\font"
26790 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26791 in black instead of blue.
26792 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26793 Here is an example:
26794 \begin_inset Formula
26797 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26798 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26807 \begin_layout Subsection
26809 \begin_inset Index idx
26812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26821 \begin_layout Standard
26822 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26823 automatically chosen in most situations.
26841 For most characters,
26849 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26850 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26855 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26856 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26857 thinks are appropriate.
26858 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26861 arg "math-insert \\style"
26865 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26866 For example, you can set
26867 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26870 , which is normally in
26879 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26883 The four styles are used in the following example:
26886 \begin_layout Standard
26887 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26891 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26895 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26899 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26905 \begin_layout Standard
26906 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26907 is set in a particular size with the menu
26909 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26911 \begin_inset space ~
26916 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26917 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26918 will be adjusted to correspond.
26919 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26930 \begin_layout Standard
26934 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26940 \begin_layout Section
26941 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26943 \begin_inset Index idx
26946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26953 \begin_inset Index idx
26956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26965 \begin_layout Standard
26967 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26968 that are in common use.
26971 \begin_layout Subsection
26972 Enabling AMS-Support
26975 \begin_layout Standard
26976 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26977 the document by selecting the checkbox
26980 \begin_inset space ~
26984 \begin_inset space ~
26988 \begin_inset space ~
26995 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26999 \begin_inset Index idx
27002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27003 Document ! Settings
27011 \begin_inset space ~
27017 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27018 -errors in formulas,
27019 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27022 \begin_layout Subsection
27024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27026 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27031 \begin_inset Index idx
27034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27035 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27043 \begin_layout Standard
27044 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27045 provides a selection of different formula types.
27047 allows you to choose between
27068 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27069 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27076 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27079 \begin_layout Chapter
27083 \begin_layout Section
27085 \begin_inset Index idx
27088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27097 name "sec:Cross-References"
27104 \begin_layout Standard
27105 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27106 's strengths is cross-references.
27107 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27109 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27110 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27111 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27114 \begin_layout Enumerate
27118 \begin_layout Enumerate
27119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27121 name "enu:Second-item"
27128 \begin_layout Enumerate
27132 \begin_layout Standard
27133 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27138 or by pressing the toolbar button
27145 A gray label box like this:
27146 \begin_inset Graphics
27147 filename clipart/label.png
27151 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27153 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27188 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27189 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27205 \begin_layout Standard
27206 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27211 or the toolbar button
27214 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27218 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27219 \begin_inset Graphics
27220 filename clipart/reference.png
27224 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27226 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27239 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27243 \begin_layout Standard
27244 As an alternative to
27246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27249 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27254 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27255 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27257 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27269 \begin_layout Standard
27270 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27271 \begin_inset space ~
27275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27277 reference "enu:Second-item"
27284 \begin_layout Standard
27285 It is recommended to use a protected space
27289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27290 described in section
27291 \begin_inset space ~
27295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27297 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27306 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27307 line breaks between them.
27310 \begin_layout Standard
27311 There are six formats of cross-references:
27314 \begin_layout Description
27315 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27318 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27325 \begin_layout Description
27326 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27327 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27339 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27346 \begin_layout Description
27347 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27348 \begin_inset space ~
27352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27353 LatexCommand pageref
27354 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27361 \begin_layout Description
27363 \begin_inset space ~
27367 \begin_inset space ~
27370 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27372 LatexCommand vpageref
27373 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27378 \begin_inset Newline newline
27381 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27382 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27383 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27384 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27385 it prints “on the next page”.
27386 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27389 \begin_layout Description
27391 \begin_inset space ~
27395 \begin_inset space ~
27399 \begin_inset space ~
27402 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27405 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27410 \begin_inset Newline newline
27413 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27419 ; otherwise it behaves like
27423 \begin_inset space ~
27427 \begin_inset space ~
27436 \begin_layout Description
27438 \begin_inset space ~
27441 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27442 \begin_inset Newline newline
27446 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27454 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27464 \begin_inset Index idx
27467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27469 -packages ! prettyref
27475 \begin_inset Index idx
27478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27480 -packages ! refstyle
27491 \begin_inset Newline newline
27494 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27495 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27498 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27503 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27511 is the default and preferred because
27515 supports only English documents.
27516 The format is specified by using the command
27528 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27529 preamble of the document.
27530 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27544 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414614
27552 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414616
27556 \begin_inset Newline newline
27563 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27566 \change_inserted 424524441 1484857490
27570 \begin_inset Newline newline
27573 Please note that neither
27581 (nor \SpecialChar LyX
27582 itself) predefines reference formats for all available types.
27583 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27585 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27586 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27591 , you might do so as follows:
27592 \begin_inset Newline newline
27599 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27606 \begin_inset Newline newline
27609 For more information about
27610 \change_inserted 424524441 1484843645
27611 defining formatted references
27612 \change_deleted 424524441 1484843647
27615 , have a look at the package documentation
27616 \change_deleted 424524441 1484843659
27620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27622 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27628 \change_inserted 424524441 1484843594
27630 \begin_inset Newline newline
27633 The `Plural' and `Capitalized' options will be available with formatted
27634 references only if you are using the
27639 See its documentation, again, for more information.
27642 \begin_layout Description
27644 \begin_inset space ~
27647 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27649 LatexCommand nameref
27650 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27655 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414460
27659 \begin_layout Description
27661 \change_inserted 424524441 1483817846
27663 \begin_inset space ~
27666 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27667 label for the reference.
27668 This allows for customization, using ERT, if you want to issue a command
27669 that LyX does not support.
27674 , then you may want to use the
27675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27682 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27692 This is the form needed for, e.g.,
27697 \change_deleted 424524441 1483414539
27701 \begin_layout Standard
27702 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27703 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27705 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27709 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27713 \begin_layout Standard
27714 You can only use the style
27718 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27722 is always possible.
27725 \begin_layout Standard
27726 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27727 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27729 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27730 \begin_inset space ~
27734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27736 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27743 \begin_layout Standard
27744 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27748 \begin_inset space ~
27752 \begin_inset space ~
27757 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27758 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27761 \begin_inset space ~
27766 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27767 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27770 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27776 \begin_layout Standard
27777 You can change labels at any time.
27778 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27779 do not need to think about this.
27782 \begin_layout Standard
27783 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27785 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27789 \begin_layout Standard
27790 References are described in detail in the section
27791 \begin_inset space ~
27801 \begin_inset space ~
27807 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27811 \begin_layout Standard
27813 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27814 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27819 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27824 It is recommended to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27830 \begin_inset Index idx
27833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27835 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27837 -packages ! refstyle
27847 \begin_inset Index idx
27850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27852 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27854 -packages ! prettyref
27859 does not know all of \SpecialChar LyX
27860 's possible label shortcuts
27864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27866 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27874 is for example \SpecialChar LyX
27875 's shortcut for labels in figure captions.
27880 and is not internationalized.
27890 \begin_layout Section
27891 Table of Contents and other Listings
27892 \begin_inset Index idx
27895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27902 \begin_inset Index idx
27905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27906 Navigating ! Outline
27912 \begin_inset Index idx
27915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27931 \begin_layout Subsection
27933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27935 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27942 \begin_layout Standard
27943 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27946 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27948 \begin_inset space ~
27952 \begin_inset space ~
27958 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27960 If you click on it, the
27964 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27965 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27966 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27968 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27970 \begin_inset space ~
27975 that is described in section
27976 \begin_inset space ~
27980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27982 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27989 \begin_layout Standard
27990 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27991 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27993 \begin_inset space ~
27997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27999 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28003 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28005 \begin_inset space ~
28009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28011 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28015 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28017 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28020 \begin_layout Subsection
28021 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28024 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28031 \begin_layout Standard
28032 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28034 You can insert them via the
28036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28040 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28043 \begin_layout Section
28044 URLs and Hyperlinks
28045 \begin_inset Index idx
28048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28055 \begin_inset Index idx
28058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28067 \begin_layout Subsection
28069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28078 \begin_layout Standard
28079 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28081 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28087 \begin_layout Standard
28088 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28090 \begin_inset Flex URL
28093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28103 \begin_layout Standard
28104 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28110 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28114 \begin_layout Standard
28115 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28123 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28132 \begin_layout Subsection
28134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28136 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28143 \begin_layout Standard
28144 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28149 or with the toolbar button
28156 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28165 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28166 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28167 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28169 name "LyX's homepage"
28170 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28175 , an Email address like this:
28176 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28178 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28179 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28185 , or a link to a file.
28188 \begin_layout Standard
28189 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28202 to the link target.
28205 \begin_layout Standard
28206 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28207 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28208 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28209 the text style dialog.
28210 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28214 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28216 name "LyX's homepage"
28217 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28225 \begin_layout Standard
28226 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28230 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28232 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28233 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28237 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28239 \begin_inset Newline newline
28247 \begin_inset Newline newline
28254 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28257 \begin_layout Section
28259 \begin_inset Index idx
28262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28271 name "sec:Appendices"
28278 \begin_layout Standard
28279 Appendices are created with the menu
28281 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28283 \begin_inset space ~
28287 \begin_inset space ~
28293 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28294 as the appendix part of the book.
28295 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28298 \begin_layout Standard
28299 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28300 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28301 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28302 and the subsection number.
28303 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28307 \begin_layout Standard
28309 \begin_inset space ~
28313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28315 reference "chap:Credits"
28320 \begin_inset space ~
28324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28326 reference "subsec:Export"
28333 \begin_layout Section
28335 \begin_inset Index idx
28338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28347 name "sec:Bibliography"
28354 \begin_layout Standard
28355 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28357 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880152
28359 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880151
28363 You can include a bibliography database,
28364 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880276
28369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28370 Known under the name
28371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28374 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28386 which is explained in
28387 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28388 the next subsection
28389 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890955
28391 \begin_inset space ~
28395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28397 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28406 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28412 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28414 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883190
28418 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883197
28422 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890942
28426 \begin_inset space ~
28430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28432 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28437 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883212
28441 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28443 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28445 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28448 author-year citations,
28449 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28450 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28453 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28455 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28456 should seriously consider
28463 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28465 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28468 a bibliography database.
28469 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28473 \begin_layout Standard
28475 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28476 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28477 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28481 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28482 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28483 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28484 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28485 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28490 \begin_layout Subsection
28492 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885645
28493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28495 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28501 The Bibliography Environment
28504 \begin_layout Standard
28509 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28511 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28520 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28523 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28524 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28525 of ASCII characters only.
28528 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28538 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28539 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28543 \begin_layout Standard
28544 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28549 or the toolbar button
28552 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28556 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28557 containing the available citations.
28558 Select one or more keys from the list and
28568 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28569 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28573 \begin_layout Standard
28574 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28575 entry with surrounding brackets.
28580 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28581 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28593 \begin_layout Standard
28597 Companion Second Edition
28600 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28602 key "latexcompanion"
28610 \begin_layout Standard
28611 The \SpecialChar LyX
28612 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28613 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28621 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28625 \begin_layout Standard
28627 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28628 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28633 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28645 Author A and Author B(Year)
28646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28653 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28655 Then, if you select
28661 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28665 \begin_inset Index idx
28668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28670 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28671 Document ! Settings
28678 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28684 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28691 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28696 \begin_layout Standard
28697 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28700 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28702 \begin_inset space ~
28710 arg "layout-paragraph"
28714 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28717 \begin_layout Subsection
28718 Bibliography databases
28719 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28720 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28724 \begin_inset Index idx
28727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28728 Bibliography ! Databases
28734 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28736 \begin_inset Index idx
28739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28740 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28751 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28758 \begin_layout Standard
28759 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28760 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28762 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28765 in different documents.
28769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28770 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28772 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28773 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28778 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28780 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28781 your working field in a database.
28782 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28783 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28784 list for that document.
28785 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28789 \begin_layout Standard
28790 The database is a text file with the file extension
28791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28802 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28803 The format is explained in
28804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28811 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28813 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28815 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28821 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28822 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28823 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28825 \begin_inset Flex URL
28828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28830 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28836 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28840 \begin_layout Standard
28842 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28844 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28845 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28846 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28848 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28849 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28850 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28852 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28861 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28862 (although it has been significantly
28863 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28870 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28875 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28876 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28877 might conversely fail to correctly
28878 handle databases that use specific
28889 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28893 \begin_layout Standard
28895 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28896 Both approaches are described in turn.
28899 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28901 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28902 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28904 \begin_inset Index idx
28907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28909 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28910 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28921 \begin_layout Standard
28923 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28925 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28929 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28930 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28940 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28942 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28946 \begin_inset space ~
28952 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28953 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28954 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28955 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28965 Add bibliography to TOC
28967 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28972 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28973 in the document or just the cited references.
28976 \begin_layout Standard
28978 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28979 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28982 style file is a text file with the file extension
28983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28994 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28995 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28996 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28997 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28999 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
29004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29005 For information on how this is done, have a look at
29006 \begin_inset Newline newline
29010 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29012 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29023 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
29024 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29029 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29035 \begin_layout Standard
29036 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29037 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
29041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29043 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
29045 \begin_inset Index idx
29048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29050 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
29051 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29059 \begin_layout Standard
29061 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
29062 Accessing a database via
29066 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29074 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29076 \begin_inset space ~
29082 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
29083 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29085 you cannot select a
29089 file (we will explain later, why).
29090 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29093 Add bibliography to TOC
29095 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29100 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29101 in the document or just the cited references.
29104 \begin_layout Standard
29106 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
29111 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
29113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29124 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
29126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29137 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29138 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
29139 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
29140 bibliography style.
29143 \begin_layout Standard
29145 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
29150 styles are not set in the
29153 \begin_inset space ~
29164 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29165 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29169 However, in the former dialog (in the
29173 field which is only visible if you use
29177 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
29178 (for instance concerning its heading).
29179 These options are detailed in the
29184 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29196 \begin_layout Standard
29198 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
29199 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29200 \begin_inset space ~
29204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29206 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29216 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29218 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
29219 Bibliography Processors
29222 \begin_layout Standard
29223 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29225 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
29226 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
29227 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
29232 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
29234 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
29238 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
29244 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
29245 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
29249 \begin_layout Standard
29251 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
29252 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
29254 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29255 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
29256 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29261 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
29262 do this on a general level in
29264 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29265 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29266 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29269 , or for individual documents
29270 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
29271 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
29280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29281 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29283 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
29288 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29289 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29290 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29296 The following variants are
29297 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
29299 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
29300 available by default
29305 \begin_layout Description
29307 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
29308 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
29312 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29320 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
29321 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
29322 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
29323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29327 \begin_inset space \space{}
29334 ), only with the package
29337 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
29340 and many specific features
29347 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
29348 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
29350 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
29355 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29364 \begin_layout Description
29365 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29366 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29367 with all bibliography packages,
29368 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
29370 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
29374 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
29375 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
29376 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
29378 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
29384 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
29387 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
29392 \begin_layout Description
29393 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29394 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
29395 (but no Unicode support)
29397 , larger memory than
29401 , works with all bibliography packages
29402 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
29403 , although more complex
29407 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29411 features are supported.
29414 \begin_layout Standard
29416 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
29418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29425 bibliography processor set in
29427 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29428 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29439 bibliography processor in
29441 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29442 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29443 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29446 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29447 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29456 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29457 -based bibliography styles).
29458 This should suit most needs.
29463 \begin_layout Standard
29465 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29466 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29467 By default, this is
29475 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29476 You can adjust it in
29478 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29479 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29480 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29488 \begin_layout Standard
29490 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29491 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29493 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29494 Selected bibliography processors
29496 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29497 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29498 specification of the variants
29499 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29503 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29505 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29509 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29512 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29514 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29520 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29530 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29542 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29548 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29554 \begin_layout Standard
29556 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29558 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29561 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29562 When you select the option
29564 Sectioned bibliography
29568 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29569 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29572 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29576 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29578 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29582 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29586 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29589 are explained in detail in section
29591 Customizing Bibliographies
29595 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29600 Additional Features
29605 \begin_layout Standard
29607 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29608 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29609 the two methods of creating them.
29610 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29611 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29612 We used the style file
29616 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29621 \begin_layout Subsection
29623 \begin_inset Index idx
29626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29627 Bibliography ! Citation format
29633 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29637 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29646 \begin_layout Standard
29648 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29649 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29650 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29654 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29663 ) or author-year citations (as
29664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29673 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29679 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29680 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29687 \begin_inset Index idx
29690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29692 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29693 Document ! Settings
29700 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29703 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29704 bibliography approach.
29707 \begin_layout Standard
29709 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29714 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29719 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29723 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29730 \begin_layout Standard
29732 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29733 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29741 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29749 Currently, the following options are available:
29752 \begin_layout Itemize
29754 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29761 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29765 \begin_layout Itemize
29767 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29776 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29778 Biblatex citation style
29782 Biblatex bibliography style
29785 Many different style variants are supported.
29790 package can be entered in the
29797 \begin_layout Itemize
29799 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29802 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29812 natbib compatibility mode
29813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29817 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29822 (see below) or want to emulate
29826 behavior very closely.
29831 , this option has some additional styles.
29832 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29837 styles are also supported by this variant.
29840 \begin_layout Itemize
29842 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29851 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29854 \begin_layout Itemize
29856 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29865 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29872 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29881 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29883 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29888 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29890 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29891 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29908 , a suitable style is proposed).
29913 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29917 \begin_layout Standard
29919 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29920 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29922 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29924 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29927 n the citation reference dialog
29928 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29929 you can set a special citation format
29933 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29934 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29935 a name prefix such as
29936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29951 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29955 e., use or don't use
29956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29965 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29966 For this feature you need to enable the option
29972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29976 \begin_inset Index idx
29979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29980 Document ! Settings
29990 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29991 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29992 style files as explained in
29993 the previous section.
29998 \begin_layout Standard
30000 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
30001 In the citation dialog,
30002 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
30004 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
30007 ou can also set text to appear
30008 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
30011 after a citation reference,
30012 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
30013 in the citation reference window
30014 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
30016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30020 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30038 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
30040 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
30043 example where the text
30044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30048 \begin_inset space ~
30052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30055 appears after the reference:
30058 \begin_layout Quote
30060 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30063 key "latexcompanion"
30069 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
30073 \begin_layout Standard
30075 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998090
30076 All styles except for
30080 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
30081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30089 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30093 \begin_layout Standard
30095 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998495
30096 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30097 That is to say, if you refer to multiple references at one, the prenote
30098 will precede the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the
30104 styles allow for adding pre- and postnotes to any individual reference
30105 in a multi-citation (so-called
30106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30109 qualified citation lists
30110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30116 If you use such a style, and if the current reference includes multiple
30118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30125 window will display three columns:
30126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30150 If you double-click on an item's
30151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30166 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30171 General text before
30172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30183 input widgets, you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30188 \begin_layout Section
30190 \begin_inset Index idx
30193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30209 \begin_layout Standard
30210 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30214 \begin_inset space ~
30219 or the toolbar button
30226 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30227 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30228 by \SpecialChar LyX
30229 as the index entry.
30232 \begin_layout Standard
30233 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30236 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30238 \begin_inset space ~
30244 A light blue box labeled
30245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30256 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30257 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30261 \begin_layout Standard
30262 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30263 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30264 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30265 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30267 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30269 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30277 \begin_layout Subsection
30278 Grouping Index Entries
30279 \begin_inset Index idx
30282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30291 \begin_layout Standard
30292 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30294 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30295 lists under the entry
30296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30304 First we create the entry
30305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30313 \begin_inset space ~
30317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30319 reference "subsec:Lists"
30324 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30325 \begin_inset space ~
30329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30331 reference "sec:Itemize"
30335 , we insert the command
30338 \begin_layout Standard
30344 \begin_layout Standard
30348 \begin_layout Standard
30354 \begin_layout Standard
30355 for the enumerated list in section
30356 \begin_inset space ~
30360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30362 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30369 \begin_layout Standard
30370 The exclamation mark
30371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30378 marks the grouping levels.
30379 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30380 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30381 If we don't have an index entry for
30382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30389 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30392 \begin_layout Subsection
30394 \begin_inset Index idx
30397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30398 Index ! Page ranges
30406 \begin_layout Standard
30407 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30409 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30410 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30411 an index entry in section
30412 \begin_inset space ~
30416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30418 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30425 \begin_layout Standard
30428 Paragraph environments|(
30431 \begin_layout Standard
30432 and another entry at the end of section
30433 \begin_inset space ~
30437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30439 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30446 \begin_layout Standard
30449 Paragraph environments|)
30452 \begin_layout Standard
30454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30477 respectively start and end the index range.
30478 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30479 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30480 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30481 An example is the index entry
30482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30485 Document ! Settings
30486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30492 \begin_layout Subsection
30494 \begin_inset Index idx
30497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30498 Index ! Cross referencing
30506 \begin_layout Standard
30507 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30508 We referred for example in the index entry
30509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30517 \begin_inset space ~
30521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30523 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30527 ) to the index entry
30528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30535 in the same section using the entry
30538 \begin_layout Standard
30541 GIF|see{Image formats}
30544 \begin_layout Standard
30545 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30547 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30548 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30551 \begin_layout Subsection
30553 \begin_inset Index idx
30556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30557 Index ! Entry order
30565 \begin_layout Standard
30566 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30567 follow the rules for the index order.
30568 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30574 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30576 \begin_inset space ~
30580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30582 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30591 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30592 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30617 \begin_inset Index idx
30620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30621 Dummy entries ! maïs
30627 \begin_inset Index idx
30630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30631 Dummy entries ! maître
30637 \begin_inset Index idx
30640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30641 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30646 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30647 maïs, maison, maître.
30648 To achieve this, we use the command
30651 \begin_layout Standard
30654 previous entry@current entry
30657 \begin_layout Standard
30658 In our case we want to have
30659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30674 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30677 \begin_layout Standard
30683 \begin_layout Standard
30684 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30685 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30687 See the next subsection for an example.
30690 \begin_layout Standard
30691 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30697 \begin_layout Standard
30698 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30703 to generate the index (see section
30704 \begin_inset space ~
30708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30710 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30719 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30720 -package aeguill in section
30721 \begin_inset space ~
30725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30727 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30731 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30732 -packages although all these index
30733 commands start with
30734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30747 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30752 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30755 \begin_layout Standard
30767 \begin_layout Standard
30779 \begin_layout Subsection
30781 \begin_inset Index idx
30784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30785 Index ! Entry layout
30793 \begin_layout Standard
30794 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30795 \begin_inset Index idx
30798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30801 This is an italic dummy entry
30806 You can also format the page number using the character
30807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30814 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30815 -command without a backslash.
30816 We can write for example
30819 \begin_layout Standard
30822 italic page number:|textit
30825 \begin_layout Standard
30826 to get the page number in italic.
30827 \begin_inset Index idx
30830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30831 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30836 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30837 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30855 \begin_inset space ~
30861 Have a look at section
30862 \begin_inset space ~
30866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30868 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30872 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30876 \begin_layout Standard
30877 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30885 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30889 to generate the index, see section
30890 \begin_inset space ~
30894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30896 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30905 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30910 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30911 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30914 key "latexcompanion"
30927 \begin_layout Standard
30928 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30930 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30931 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30932 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30933 If so, put the following in the preamble
30936 \begin_layout Standard
30948 \begin_layout Standard
30952 \begin_layout Standard
30958 \begin_layout Standard
30959 in the index entry.
30960 \begin_inset Index idx
30963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30964 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30969 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30970 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30971 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30974 \begin_layout Standard
30975 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30976 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30977 a bold font for all index entries.
30978 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30990 documentation for details,
30991 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30993 key "makeindex,xindy"
31001 \begin_layout Subsection
31003 \begin_inset Index idx
31006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31015 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31022 \begin_layout Standard
31023 If the index generation program
31027 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31028 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31032 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31033 distribution, is used.
31037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31042 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31043 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31044 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31045 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31046 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31056 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31058 dialog, see section
31059 \begin_inset space ~
31063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31065 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31070 The available options are listed and explained in
31071 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31073 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31079 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31083 \begin_layout Standard
31084 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31085 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31088 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31089 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31093 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31094 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31097 \begin_layout Subsection
31101 \begin_layout Standard
31102 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31103 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31111 next to the standard index.
31113 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31114 that add this feature.
31121 \begin_inset Index idx
31124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31126 -packages ! splitidx
31131 package to generate multiple indexes.
31132 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31138 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31140 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31148 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31149 style, but it also includes
31150 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31151 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31159 \begin_layout Standard
31160 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31161 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31163 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31164 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31167 and select the option
31169 Use multiple Indexes
31176 already contains the standard index
31177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31185 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31186 also appear as a heading) to the
31190 input field and press the
31195 The new index now also appears in the list.
31196 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31197 label color to the new index.
31200 \begin_layout Standard
31201 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31211 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31212 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31213 are additional features:
31216 \begin_layout Itemize
31217 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31218 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31221 \begin_layout Itemize
31222 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31223 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31231 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31232 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31233 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31234 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31237 \begin_layout Section
31238 Nomenclature/Glossary
31239 \begin_inset Index idx
31242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31249 \begin_inset Index idx
31252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31283 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31290 \begin_layout Standard
31291 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31292 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31293 called nomenclature or glossary.
31296 \begin_layout Standard
31297 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31304 \begin_inset Index idx
31307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31309 -packages ! nomencl
31315 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31317 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31324 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31328 \begin_layout Standard
31329 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31330 and then use the menu
31332 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31338 \begin_inset space ~
31343 or the toolbar button
31346 arg "nomencl-insert"
31351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31362 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31365 \begin_layout Standard
31366 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31367 The first is the term or
31371 that you wish to define.
31376 of the term or symbol.
31379 \begin_layout Standard
31380 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31388 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31389 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31397 \begin_layout Subsection
31398 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31399 \begin_inset Index idx
31402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31403 Nomenclature ! Layout
31411 \begin_layout Standard
31412 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31416 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31423 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31431 \begin_inset Newline newline
31439 \begin_inset Newline newline
31445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31452 character starts/ends the formula.
31453 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31454 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31466 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31476 \begin_layout Standard
31477 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31478 -syntax is given in section
31479 \begin_inset space ~
31483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31485 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31492 \begin_layout Standard
31496 \begin_inset space ~
31501 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31503 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31508 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31515 in this document is:
31516 \begin_inset Newline newline
31521 dummy entry for the character
31526 \begin_inset Newline newline
31538 \begin_inset space ~
31548 font use the command
31577 \begin_layout Standard
31578 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31579 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31583 \begin_inset space \space{}
31587 \begin_inset Newline newline
31603 \begin_inset Newline newline
31606 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31607 This command will make the font of all symbols
31614 \begin_inset space ~
31622 \begin_layout Standard
31623 If the characters |
31624 \begin_inset space \space{}
31628 \begin_inset space \space{}
31632 \begin_inset space \space{}
31636 \begin_inset space \space{}
31640 \begin_inset space \space{}
31643 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31644 a quote character in front of them.
31645 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31646 LatexCommand nomenclature
31647 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31648 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31656 \begin_layout Subsection
31657 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31658 \begin_inset Index idx
31661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31662 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31670 \begin_layout Standard
31671 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31672 -code of the symbol
31674 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31676 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31679 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31680 LatexCommand nomenclature
31682 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31690 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31694 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31695 LatexCommand nomenclature
31698 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31704 They will be sorted by
31705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31731 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31734 will be sorted before the
31738 since the character
31739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31746 is considered in sorting.
31749 \begin_layout Standard
31750 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31753 \begin_inset space ~
31758 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31759 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31761 For the example given, you can insert
31765 in this field for the
31766 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31773 will be located before
31774 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31780 \begin_layout Standard
31781 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31786 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31796 \begin_layout Subsection
31797 Nomenclature Options
31798 \begin_inset Index idx
31801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31802 Nomenclature ! Options
31810 \begin_layout Standard
31815 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31816 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31819 \begin_layout Description
31820 refeq Appends the phrase
31821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31836 to every nomenclature entry, where
31842 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31845 \begin_layout Description
31846 refpage Appends the phrase
31847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31862 to every nomenclature entry, where
31868 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31871 \begin_layout Description
31872 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31875 \begin_layout Standard
31876 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31877 class options list in the
31879 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31883 In this document the options
31890 \begin_layout Standard
31891 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31897 \begin_layout Standard
31898 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31899 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31904 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31907 \begin_layout Description
31917 \begin_layout Description
31920 nomrefpage Like the
31927 \begin_layout Description
31930 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31939 \begin_layout Description
31943 \begin_inset space ~
31949 \begin_inset space ~
31954 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31957 \begin_layout Standard
31959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31966 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31967 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31971 \begin_layout Standard
31979 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31982 \begin_inset Newline newline
31989 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31994 \begin_inset Newline newline
31998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32013 by their translation.
32016 \begin_layout Subsection
32017 Printing the Nomenclature
32018 \begin_inset Index idx
32021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32022 Nomenclature ! Printing
32030 \begin_layout Standard
32031 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
32033 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32034 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32050 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
32051 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
32052 You can choose between these settings:
32055 \begin_layout Description
32056 Default a space of 1
32057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32063 \begin_layout Description
32065 \begin_inset space ~
32069 \begin_inset space ~
32072 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
32075 \begin_layout Description
32076 Custom custom space
32079 \begin_layout Standard
32080 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
32081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32089 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
32097 For example, in order to change the name to
32101 , add the following line to the preamble:
32104 \begin_layout Standard
32112 nomname}{List of Symbols}
32115 \begin_layout Subsection
32116 Nomenclature Program
32117 \begin_inset Index idx
32120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32121 Nomenclature ! Program
32127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32129 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32136 \begin_layout Standard
32142 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32143 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32145 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32150 by adding options, see section
32151 \begin_inset space ~
32155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32157 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32162 The available options are listed and explained in
32163 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32165 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32173 \begin_layout Section
32175 \begin_inset Index idx
32178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32185 \begin_inset Index idx
32188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32189 Document ! Branches
32195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32197 name "sec:Branches"
32204 \begin_layout Standard
32205 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32206 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32207 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32208 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32211 \begin_layout Standard
32212 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32213 allows you to put text into branches.
32214 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32215 To create a branch, either select the menu
32217 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32218 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32221 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32230 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32231 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32232 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32233 and whether the name of the branch should
32234 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32235 (see below for an example).
32236 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32237 to the name of the other) and to add
32238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32250 \begin_inset space ~
32253 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32254 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32257 \begin_layout Standard
32258 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32259 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32264 where you can choose a branch.
32265 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32269 \begin_layout Standard
32270 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32271 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32274 \begin_layout Standard
32275 \begin_inset Branch Question
32279 \begin_layout Standard
32280 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32288 \begin_layout Standard
32289 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32293 \begin_layout Standard
32294 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32302 \begin_layout Standard
32309 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32310 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32313 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32314 Consider for example a file
32315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32322 which has the above branches.
32324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32331 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32355 branch were inactive,
32356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32371 branch was active, likewise
32372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32387 branch was active, and
32388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32391 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32395 if both branches were active.
32396 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32397 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
32401 \begin_layout Standard
32403 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32404 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
32405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32412 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
32418 \begin_inset Branch Question
32422 \begin_layout Standard
32424 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
32425 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
32433 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32434 To control whether a particular inset is
32435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32442 , right-click on the inset button and choose
32443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32449 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32455 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
32459 \begin_layout Standard
32460 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32466 \begin_layout Standard
32467 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32468 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32469 definitions for each branch.
32470 For example you can define for the question branch
32474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32475 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32476 -syntax, see section
32477 \begin_inset space ~
32481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32483 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32495 \begin_layout Standard
32505 \begin_layout Standard
32515 \begin_layout Standard
32516 and for the answer branch
32519 \begin_layout Standard
32529 \begin_layout Standard
32539 \begin_layout Standard
32540 \begin_inset Branch Question
32544 \begin_layout Standard
32548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32576 \begin_layout Standard
32577 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32581 \begin_layout Standard
32585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32613 \begin_layout Standard
32614 Now it is possible to use the
32618 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32625 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32628 commands to obtain conditional output.
32629 Here is an example formula where only the
32636 \begin_inset Formula
32638 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32646 \begin_layout Standard
32647 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32655 \begin_layout Standard
32656 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32662 \begin_inset space \space{}
32665 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32667 For this advanced usage, see the
32673 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32678 \begin_layout Section
32680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32682 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32687 \begin_inset Index idx
32690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32699 \begin_layout Standard
32702 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32703 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32706 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32708 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32714 \begin_inset Index idx
32717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32719 -packages ! hyperref
32724 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32725 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32726 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32727 part of the document.
32731 \begin_layout Standard
32732 The header information in the dialog tab
32736 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32737 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32738 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32739 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32743 \begin_inset space ~
32747 \begin_inset space ~
32752 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32753 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32754 and author entries.
32758 \begin_inset space ~
32762 \begin_inset space ~
32766 \begin_inset space ~
32771 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32774 \begin_layout Standard
32775 You can specify in the dialog tab
32779 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32784 \begin_inset space ~
32788 \begin_inset space ~
32792 \begin_inset space ~
32797 option allows long links to be split;
32800 \begin_inset space ~
32804 \begin_inset space ~
32808 \begin_inset space ~
32816 \begin_inset space ~
32821 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32824 \begin_inset space ~
32829 colors the different links.
32830 The default colors are:
32833 \begin_layout Labeling
32834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32839 for hyperlinks and URLs
32842 \begin_layout Labeling
32843 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32851 \begin_layout Labeling
32852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32860 \begin_layout Standard
32861 but you can change these in the field
32866 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32869 \begin_layout Standard
32872 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32875 \begin_layout Standard
32880 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32881 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32882 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32885 \begin_layout Standard
32890 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32891 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32892 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32902 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32903 when opening the PDF.
32905 \begin_inset space ~
32908 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32909 \begin_inset space ~
32912 1 will only display the sections.
32915 \begin_layout Standard
32916 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32917 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32923 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32924 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32934 \begin_layout Section
32936 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32940 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32947 \begin_layout Subsection
32950 \begin_inset Index idx
32953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32963 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32970 \begin_layout Standard
32971 As \SpecialChar LyX
32972 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32973 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32974 commands and constructs,
32977 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32978 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32979 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32980 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32981 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32982 cannot support all packages and
32986 \begin_layout Standard
32987 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32988 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32989 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32993 Code box is created by the menu
32995 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32997 \begin_inset space ~
33002 or by the toolbar button
33015 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
33023 \begin_layout Standard
33024 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
33026 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
33028 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
33032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33033 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
33038 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33045 , you can write the command part
33051 in a \SpecialChar TeX
33052 Code box before the word and the closing brace
33056 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
33057 Code box behind the word.
33058 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
33059 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
33063 \begin_layout Standard
33064 \begin_inset Graphics
33065 filename clipart/ERT.png
33073 \begin_layout Standard
33077 \begin_layout Standard
33078 This is a line with a
33082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33105 \begin_layout Standard
33106 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33114 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33115 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
33116 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
33117 know that the command is finished.
33125 \begin_layout Subsection
33126 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33128 \begin_inset Argument 1
33131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33132 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33139 \begin_inset Index idx
33142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33152 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33159 \begin_layout Standard
33160 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33161 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33162 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33163 uses in the background.
33164 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33165 is based on commands, you can
33166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33174 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33175 any time if you know the right commands.
33176 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33177 is the end of the day.
33178 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33179 all caption labels bold.
33180 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33182 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33186 \begin_layout Standard
33187 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33189 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33191 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33194 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33204 \begin_layout Standard
33205 As result you find that the package
33210 \begin_inset Index idx
33213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33215 -packages ! caption
33221 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33226 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33230 \begin_inset space ~
33238 \begin_layout Standard
33243 usepackage[options]{package name}
33246 \begin_layout Standard
33247 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33248 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33249 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33250 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33253 \begin_layout Standard
33254 In your case the package name is
33259 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33264 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33265 So you add the command
33268 \begin_layout Standard
33273 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33276 \begin_layout Standard
33277 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33282 For more commands provided by the
33286 package, have a look at its documentation,
33287 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33302 \begin_layout Standard
33303 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33305 For example if you use a
33309 class, you don't need the package
33313 , you can instead write
33316 \begin_layout Standard
33321 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33326 \begin_layout Standard
33327 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33328 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33329 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33336 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33339 \begin_layout Standard
33340 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33341 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33343 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33344 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33345 Code box as described in the previous
33349 \begin_layout Standard
33350 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33351 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33356 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33364 \begin_layout Standard
33365 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33371 \begin_layout Standard
33375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33385 \begin_inset Note Note
33388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33389 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33397 \begin_layout Left Header
33398 \begin_inset Argument 1
33401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33421 \begin_inset Note Note
33424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33425 defines the header line as described below
33433 \begin_layout Center Header
33434 \begin_inset Argument 1
33437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33446 \begin_layout Right Header
33447 \begin_inset Argument 1
33450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33471 \begin_layout Left Footer
33472 \begin_inset Argument 1
33475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33496 \begin_layout Center Footer
33497 \begin_inset Argument 1
33500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33512 \begin_inset Newline newline
33516 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33522 \begin_layout Right Footer
33523 \begin_inset Argument 1
33526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33548 \begin_layout Section
33549 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33552 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33557 \begin_inset Index idx
33560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33561 Document ! Header/Footer line
33567 \begin_inset Index idx
33570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33579 \begin_layout Standard
33580 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33584 \begin_inset space ~
33595 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33601 \begin_inset space ~
33607 As a second step add in the menu
33609 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33610 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33619 Custom Header/Footerlines
33622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33626 This module offers the following 6
33627 \begin_inset space ~
33633 \begin_layout Description
33635 \begin_inset space ~
33639 \begin_inset space ~
33643 \begin_inset space ~
33647 \begin_inset space ~
33651 \begin_inset space ~
33657 \begin_layout Description
33659 \begin_inset space ~
33663 \begin_inset space ~
33667 \begin_inset space ~
33671 \begin_inset space ~
33675 \begin_inset space ~
33681 \begin_layout Standard
33682 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33683 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33686 \begin_layout Standard
33687 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33688 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33690 \begin_inset space ~
33694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33696 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33700 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33703 \begin_layout Standard
33704 \begin_inset Float figure
33710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33713 \begin_inset Tabular
33714 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33715 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33716 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33717 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33718 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33720 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33738 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33749 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33767 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33778 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33782 The normal text on the page goes here.
33783 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33785 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33786 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33791 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33800 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33811 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33829 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33840 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33858 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33876 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33881 name "fig:Page-layout"
33885 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33898 \begin_layout Standard
33899 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33907 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33911 \begin_inset space ~
33916 is set to “Default”.
33917 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33926 \begin_layout Subsection
33930 \begin_layout Standard
33931 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33932 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33933 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33934 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33936 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33938 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33941 \begin_layout Standard
33942 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33943 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33947 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33949 \begin_inset space ~
33957 \begin_layout Description
33960 thepage prints the current page number
33963 \begin_layout Description
33966 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33969 \begin_layout Description
33972 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33975 \begin_layout Description
33978 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33979 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33986 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33989 because it usually goes in a left header.
33992 \begin_layout Description
33995 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33996 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33998 It is normally used in the right header.
34001 \begin_layout Subsection
34002 Default header/footer
34005 \begin_layout Standard
34006 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
34007 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
34008 footer has the page number.
34009 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
34010 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
34011 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
34014 \begin_inset space ~
34022 \begin_layout Subsection
34026 \begin_layout Standard
34027 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
34028 Some pages are different.
34029 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
34030 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
34031 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
34032 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
34033 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
34036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34037 Header and footer decoration line
34040 \begin_layout Standard
34041 By default, you get a 0.4
34042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34045 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
34046 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
34058 in the following way:
34061 \begin_layout Standard
34068 headrulewidth}{thickness}
34071 \begin_layout Standard
34072 where thickness is a size in standard units like
34085 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
34086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34092 \begin_layout Standard
34093 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34095 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
34096 \begin_inset space ~
34100 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34111 Several header/footer lines
34114 \begin_layout Standard
34115 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
34116 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
34117 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
34119 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34134 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34135 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34137 \begin_inset space ~
34145 \begin_layout Standard
34152 headheight}{height}
34155 \begin_layout Standard
34160 is a size in standard units (e.
34161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34165 \begin_inset space \space{}
34173 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34174 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34175 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34176 logfile with the menu
34178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34180 \begin_inset space ~
34188 \begin_inset space ~
34193 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34198 \begin_inset Index idx
34201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34203 -packages ! fancyhdr
34209 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34210 for your header/footer.
34213 \begin_layout Subsection
34217 \begin_layout Standard
34218 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34219 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34220 This example consists of the following definition:
34223 \begin_layout Description
34225 \begin_inset space ~
34234 , empty optional argument
34237 \begin_layout Description
34239 \begin_inset space ~
34242 Header empty, empty optional argument
34245 \begin_layout Description
34247 \begin_inset space ~
34256 in the optional argument
34259 \begin_layout Description
34261 \begin_inset space ~
34270 in the optional argument
34273 \begin_layout Description
34275 \begin_inset space ~
34288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34292 \begin_inset Newline newline
34296 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34303 in the optional argument
34306 \begin_layout Description
34308 \begin_inset space ~
34317 , empty optional argument
34320 \begin_layout Description
34323 headrulewidth set to 2
34324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34330 \begin_layout Standard
34331 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34332 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34338 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34348 \begin_layout Standard
34349 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34355 \begin_layout Standard
34359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34363 pagestyle{headings}
34369 \begin_inset Note Note
34372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34373 switches back to page style with the default headings
34381 \begin_layout Section
34382 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34385 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34390 \begin_inset Index idx
34393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34400 \begin_inset Index idx
34403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34412 \begin_layout Standard
34414 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34415 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34416 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34419 \begin_layout Subsection
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34424 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34430 \begin_inset Index idx
34433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34435 -packages ! preview-latex
34440 (on some systems named simply
34445 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34447 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34454 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34456 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34464 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34465 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34466 -package are automatically
34467 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34471 \begin_layout Subsection
34475 \begin_layout Standard
34476 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34477 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34479 activate the option
34482 \begin_inset space ~
34489 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34495 \begin_inset space ~
34499 \begin_inset space ~
34502 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34509 \begin_inset space ~
34522 \begin_inset space ~
34527 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34530 \begin_layout Standard
34531 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34536 \begin_inset space ~
34544 \begin_inset space ~
34552 \begin_layout Standard
34553 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34554 and when you finish
34558 \begin_layout Standard
34559 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34567 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34568 generated by activating the option
34571 \begin_inset space ~
34577 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34585 \begin_layout Subsection
34586 Selected document parts
34589 \begin_layout Standard
34590 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34591 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34592 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34593 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34595 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34597 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34601 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34602 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34603 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34606 \begin_layout Standard
34607 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34614 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34626 is explained in section
34628 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34633 \begin_inset space ~
34643 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34644 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34645 the final rotated boxes,
34646 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34647 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34649 Here is the result:
34652 \begin_layout Standard
34653 \begin_inset Preview
34655 \begin_layout Standard
34660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34664 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34670 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34680 height_special "totalheight"
34685 backgroundcolor "none"
34688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34713 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34719 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34741 \begin_layout Standard
34742 Previewing works also for colors.
34743 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34762 is explained in section
34769 \begin_inset space ~
34782 \begin_layout Standard
34783 \begin_inset Preview
34785 \begin_layout Standard
34789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34808 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34813 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34832 \begin_layout Standard
34833 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34839 \begin_layout Standard
34840 If \SpecialChar LyX
34841 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34842 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34843 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34844 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34845 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34846 the \SpecialChar TeX
34848 If \SpecialChar LyX
34849 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34850 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34852 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34853 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34854 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34857 \begin_layout Subsection
34862 \begin_layout Standard
34863 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34864 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34867 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34869 \begin_inset space ~
34874 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34876 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34878 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34879 's main window, then only this selection
34880 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34881 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34882 the source view window.
34887 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34888 ; but note that if you have
34889 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34891 not just the one which is open at the time.
34894 \begin_layout Section
34895 Advanced Find and Replace
34896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34898 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34903 \begin_inset Index idx
34906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34913 \begin_inset Index idx
34916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34925 \begin_layout Subsection
34929 \begin_layout Standard
34930 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34931 allows for searching of complex,
34932 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34934 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34935 The key-features are:
34938 \begin_layout Itemize
34939 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34940 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34941 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34945 \begin_layout Itemize
34946 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34947 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34948 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34949 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34952 \begin_layout Itemize
34953 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34954 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34955 outside of mathematics environments
34958 \begin_layout Itemize
34959 Search may be widened to a specific
34964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34968 \begin_inset space ~
34971 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34972 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34979 \begin_layout Itemize
34980 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34981 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34986 \begin_inset space ~
34989 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34992 \begin_layout Subsection
34996 \begin_layout Standard
34997 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34999 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35012 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
35015 ) or the toolbar button
35018 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
35024 Advanced Find and Replace
35029 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35033 \begin_layout Standard
35039 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
35043 \begin_inset space ~
35048 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
35051 arg "paragraph-break"
35055 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
35056 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
35060 arg "paragraph-break"
35063 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
35067 searches backwards.
35070 \begin_layout Standard
35074 \begin_inset space ~
35079 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
35088 \begin_inset space ~
35093 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
35096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35097 Searching for mathematics
35100 \begin_layout Standard
35101 Mathematical formulas, such as
35102 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
35105 or something more complex like
35106 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
35109 , may be searched for by typing them in the
35114 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
35115 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
35116 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
35117 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35127 \begin_layout Standard
35128 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35129 This is done by switching to the
35133 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35138 This way, entering in the
35145 \begin_layout Itemize
35146 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35147 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35150 \begin_layout Itemize
35151 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35152 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35155 \begin_layout Itemize
35156 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35157 of it only within section headings.
35158 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35159 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35163 \begin_layout Itemize
35164 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35165 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35168 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35172 \begin_layout Standard
35173 The entries made in the
35177 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35180 \begin_inset space ~
35186 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35190 button or alternatively press
35193 arg "paragraph-break"
35200 while the cursor is in the
35203 \begin_inset space ~
35211 \begin_layout Standard
35212 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35214 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35218 \begin_layout Itemize
35219 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35220 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35228 with its typewriter version
35229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35243 \begin_layout Itemize
35244 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35250 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35262 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35269 (you may want to enable the
35272 \begin_inset space ~
35280 \begin_inset space ~
35285 options and disable the
35293 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35301 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35302 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35306 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35309 , or occurrences of
35310 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35314 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35320 \begin_layout Subsection
35324 \begin_layout Standard
35325 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35330 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35332 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35334 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35344 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35350 This is done with the context menu
35352 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35353 Insert Regular Expression
35355 while the cursor is in the
35360 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35361 expression matching rules
35365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35366 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35373 \begin_inset space ~
35376 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35377 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35383 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35384 same text in the document.
35385 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35386 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35389 \begin_layout Enumerate
35390 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35395 editor the fraction
35396 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35400 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35403 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35404 fractions with the given denominator.
35407 \begin_layout Enumerate
35408 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35420 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35425 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35426 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35427 Also, by inserting a
35428 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35431 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35432 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35435 \begin_layout Standard
35436 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35437 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35438 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35441 , and referring back to them through
35442 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35446 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35450 For example, try searching with the regexp
35451 \begin_inset Newline newline
35454 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35457 \begin_inset Newline newline
35460 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35463 \begin_layout Standard
35464 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35467 \begin_layout Standard
35468 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35476 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35477 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35478 sub-expressions is absolute.
35480 \begin_inset space ~
35484 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35487 always refers to the first occurrence of
35488 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35491 in all entered regexps.
35499 \begin_layout Section
35501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35503 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35508 \begin_inset Index idx
35511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35520 \begin_layout Standard
35522 has a built-in spell checker.
35525 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35532 key or the toolbar button
35535 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35538 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35539 beginning of the currently selected text.
35540 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35541 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35542 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35543 scrolled so that it is visible.
35544 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35545 n, if any could be found.
35546 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35550 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35551 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35554 \begin_layout Standard
35555 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35558 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35562 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35563 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35565 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35566 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35569 \begin_inset space ~
35577 arg "dialog-show character"
35580 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35582 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35585 \begin_layout Standard
35586 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35587 can be downloaded from here:
35588 \begin_inset Newline newline
35592 \begin_inset Flex URL
35595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35597 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35603 \begin_inset Newline newline
35607 \begin_inset space ~
35610 files for each language.
35611 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35612 \begin_inset space ~
35615 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35616 's installation subfolder
35624 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35626 \begin_inset Newline newline
35629 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35630 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35631 but in most cases these are
35647 is the language code.
35650 \begin_layout Subsection
35654 \begin_layout Standard
35657 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35658 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35660 \begin_inset space ~
35663 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35666 you can set the following things:
35669 \begin_layout Description
35671 \begin_inset space ~
35674 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35675 should use for spell checking.
35676 Depending on your platform,
35690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35691 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35692 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35707 \begin_inset space ~
35710 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35713 \begin_layout Description
35715 \begin_inset space ~
35718 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35719 will always use the given language
35720 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35723 \begin_layout Description
35725 \begin_inset space ~
35728 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35734 \begin_inset space \space{}
35738 This should normally not be needed.
35741 \begin_layout Description
35743 \begin_inset space ~
35747 \begin_inset space ~
35750 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35762 \begin_layout Description
35764 \begin_inset space ~
35767 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35768 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35769 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35770 appear in a context menu.
35771 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35775 \begin_layout Description
35777 \begin_inset space ~
35781 \begin_inset space ~
35785 \begin_inset space ~
35788 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35792 \begin_layout Section
35794 \begin_inset Index idx
35797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35806 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35815 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35816 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35826 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35828 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35838 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35840 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35841 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35842 which are available for many languages.
35845 \begin_layout Standard
35846 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35847 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35851 \begin_layout Subsection
35852 Setting up the thesaurus
35855 \begin_layout Standard
35864 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35868 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35873 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35879 \begin_inset space ~
35887 For instance, the US English files are named:
35890 \begin_layout Itemize
35894 \begin_layout Itemize
35898 \begin_layout Standard
35907 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35908 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35911 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35912 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35913 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35915 \begin_inset space ~
35920 ) to the path where they are installed.
35924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35925 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35926 ies, typical locations are
35932 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35936 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35940 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35943 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35949 LibreOffice-<Version>
35956 On the Mac, the default location is
35958 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35959 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35960 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35961 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35962 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35963 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35971 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35972 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35973 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35977 \begin_layout Standard
35978 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35979 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35983 \begin_layout Itemize
35984 \begin_inset Flex URL
35987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35989 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35997 \begin_layout Standard
35998 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35999 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
36001 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36002 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36003 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36005 \begin_inset space ~
36010 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36012 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
36013 and point \SpecialChar LyX
36017 \begin_layout Standard
36018 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
36020 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36023 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
36029 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
36032 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
36033 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
36035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36041 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36042 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36043 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36045 \begin_inset space ~
36050 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
36053 \begin_layout Subsection
36054 Using the thesaurus
36057 \begin_layout Standard
36058 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
36060 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36063 or the toolbar button
36066 arg "thesaurus-entry"
36069 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
36071 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
36073 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
36074 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
36075 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
36084 ), related terms (such as
36087 \begin_inset space ~
36096 ), compounds (such as
36099 \begin_inset space ~
36108 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
36117 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
36120 \begin_layout Standard
36121 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
36122 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36126 \begin_layout Standard
36127 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36128 the dictionary, such as the above
36132 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36137 \begin_inset space \space{}
36140 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36141 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36142 For example, looking up the word form
36146 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36151 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36156 \begin_inset space \space{}
36167 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36168 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36169 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36172 \begin_layout Section
36174 \begin_inset Index idx
36177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36184 \begin_inset Index idx
36187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36188 Document ! Change Tracking
36194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36196 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36203 \begin_layout Standard
36204 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36205 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36206 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36207 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36209 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36211 \begin_inset space ~
36214 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36216 \begin_inset space ~
36224 \begin_layout Standard
36225 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36239 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36240 You can change the color in
36242 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36243 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36245 \begin_inset space ~
36249 \begin_inset space ~
36254 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36260 \begin_inset Index idx
36263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36264 Color ! Change tracking
36269 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36270 's status bar when the
36271 cursor is in changed text.
36272 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36275 arg "changes-merge"
36281 \begin_layout Standard
36282 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36284 \begin_inset Index idx
36287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36296 \begin_layout Standard
36297 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36303 \begin_layout Standard
36304 \begin_inset Graphics
36305 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36313 \begin_layout Standard
36314 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36320 \begin_layout Standard
36321 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36324 \begin_layout Standard
36325 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36331 \begin_layout Standard
36332 \begin_inset Tabular
36333 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36334 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36335 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36336 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36346 arg "changes-track"
36354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36362 \begin_inset space ~
36365 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36376 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36385 arg "changes-output"
36393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36399 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36401 \begin_inset space ~
36404 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36406 \begin_inset space ~
36410 \begin_inset space ~
36414 \begin_inset space ~
36423 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36444 Jumps to the next change
36450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36459 arg "change-accept"
36467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36475 \begin_inset space ~
36478 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36480 \begin_inset space ~
36489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36498 arg "change-reject"
36506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36512 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36514 \begin_inset space ~
36517 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36519 \begin_inset space ~
36528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36537 arg "changes-merge"
36545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36553 \begin_inset space ~
36556 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36558 \begin_inset space ~
36567 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36576 arg "all-changes-accept"
36584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36590 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36592 \begin_inset space ~
36595 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36597 \begin_inset space ~
36601 \begin_inset space ~
36610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36619 arg "all-changes-reject"
36627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36635 \begin_inset space ~
36638 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36644 \begin_inset space ~
36653 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36677 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36679 \begin_inset space ~
36688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36713 \begin_inset space ~
36729 \begin_layout Standard
36730 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36736 \begin_layout Standard
36737 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36757 \begin_layout Standard
36758 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36759 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36760 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36761 the next change after the current cursor position.
36762 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36763 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36764 step to the next change.
36765 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36768 \begin_layout Standard
36769 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36770 to describe a change.
36773 \begin_layout Standard
36774 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36780 \begin_inset Index idx
36783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36785 -packages ! dvipost
36791 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36800 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36804 \begin_layout Section
36805 Comparison of Documents
36806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36808 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36813 \begin_inset Index idx
36816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36817 Comparison of documents
36825 \begin_layout Standard
36826 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36829 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36833 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36834 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36836 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36838 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36842 \begin_inset space ~
36846 \begin_inset space ~
36850 \begin_inset space ~
36859 \begin_inset space ~
36863 \begin_inset space ~
36867 \begin_inset space ~
36871 \begin_inset space ~
36875 \begin_inset space ~
36879 \begin_inset space ~
36884 enables the change tracking option
36887 \begin_inset space ~
36891 \begin_inset space ~
36895 \begin_inset space ~
36900 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36903 \begin_layout Section
36904 International Support
36905 \begin_inset Index idx
36908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36909 International support
36917 \begin_layout Standard
36918 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36919 with any language you want.
36920 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36921 up \SpecialChar LyX
36923 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36925 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36933 \begin_layout Standard
36934 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36935 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36936 \begin_inset space ~
36940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36942 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36949 \begin_layout Subsection
36951 \begin_inset Index idx
36954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36961 \begin_inset Index idx
36964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36965 Document ! Settings
36971 \begin_inset Index idx
36974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36975 Document ! Language
36983 \begin_layout Standard
36986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36987 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36990 dialog lets you set
36992 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36997 \begin_layout Standard
37002 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37007 \begin_inset space ~
37012 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
37013 For details about the different encoding options see section
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37020 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
37027 \begin_layout Subsection
37028 Keyboard mapping configuration
37029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37031 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
37038 \begin_layout Standard
37039 If you have for example a U.
37040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37043 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
37044 can use an alternate keymap.
37045 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
37050 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37051 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37052 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
37055 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
37056 \begin_inset space ~
37060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37062 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
37067 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
37068 which one you want to use.
37071 \begin_layout Standard
37072 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
37073 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
37074 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
37075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37078 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
37079 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
37080 one to support the characters you want.
37081 This and many other customizations are explained in the
37088 \begin_layout Chapter
37091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37093 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37100 \begin_layout Standard
37101 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37102 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37103 topic inside the user's guide.
37106 \begin_layout Section
37108 \begin_inset Index idx
37111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37120 \begin_layout Standard
37125 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37128 \begin_layout Subsection
37132 \begin_layout Standard
37133 Creates a new document.
37136 \begin_layout Subsection
37140 \begin_layout Standard
37141 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37142 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37143 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37146 \begin_layout Subsection
37150 \begin_layout Standard
37154 \begin_layout Subsection
37158 \begin_layout Standard
37159 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37160 Click there on a file to open it.
37163 \begin_layout Subsection
37167 \begin_layout Standard
37168 Closes the current document.
37171 \begin_layout Subsection
37175 \begin_layout Standard
37176 Closes all opened documents.
37179 \begin_layout Subsection
37183 \begin_layout Standard
37184 Saves the actual document.
37187 \begin_layout Subsection
37191 \begin_layout Standard
37192 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37195 \begin_layout Subsection
37199 \begin_layout Standard
37200 Saves all opened documents.
37203 \begin_layout Subsection
37207 \begin_layout Standard
37208 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37211 \begin_layout Subsection
37215 \begin_layout Standard
37216 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37217 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37218 It is described in the section
37220 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37225 Additional Features
37230 \begin_layout Subsection
37234 \begin_layout Standard
37235 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37236 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37238 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37239 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37243 \begin_layout Standard
37244 When using the menu entry
37247 \begin_inset space ~
37252 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37260 \begin_inset space ~
37264 \begin_inset space ~
37269 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37270 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37273 \begin_layout Subsection
37275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37277 name "subsec:Export"
37284 \begin_layout Standard
37285 You can export your document to various file formats.
37286 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37288 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37289 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37290 during its configuration.
37293 \begin_layout Standard
37294 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37296 \begin_inset space ~
37300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37302 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37309 \begin_layout Description
37315 \begin_inset space ~
37318 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37320 \begin_inset space ~
37323 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37324 \begin_inset Newline newline
37327 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37328 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37332 \begin_layout Description
37333 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37339 \begin_layout Description
37341 \begin_inset space ~
37344 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37350 \begin_layout Description
37351 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37352 's native DVI-format.
37353 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37354 files paths or file names in your document.
37356 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37363 \begin_layout Description
37364 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37365 in files paths or file names
37368 \begin_layout Description
37370 \begin_inset space ~
37377 ) DVI-format using the program
37379 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37382 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37386 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37394 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37402 \begin_layout Description
37404 \begin_inset space ~
37407 (cropped) the same as
37411 but with cropped page margins.
37414 \begin_layout Description
37416 \begin_inset space ~
37419 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37423 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37428 \begin_layout Description
37432 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37440 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37448 \begin_layout Description
37450 \begin_inset space ~
37454 \begin_inset space ~
37457 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37461 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37469 \begin_layout Description
37473 \begin_inset space ~
37482 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37483 source that is compilable with the program
37485 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37489 \begin_layout Description
37493 \begin_inset space ~
37498 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37499 source, additionally all images used in the document
37500 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37504 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37507 \begin_layout Description
37511 \begin_inset space ~
37516 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37517 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37518 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37526 \begin_layout Description
37530 \begin_inset space ~
37539 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37540 source that is compilable with the program
37546 \begin_layout Description
37548 \begin_inset space ~
37552 \begin_inset space ~
37559 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37560 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37566 \begin_layout Description
37568 \begin_inset space ~
37571 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37572 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37578 \begin_inset space \space{}
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37602 represent the version number)
37605 \begin_layout Description
37607 \begin_inset space ~
37611 \begin_inset space ~
37614 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37615 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37616 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37620 \begin_layout Description
37621 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37622 's internal XHTML engine
37625 \begin_layout Description
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37631 \begin_inset space ~
37635 \begin_inset space ~
37639 \begin_inset space ~
37642 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37647 For the conversion the program
37656 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37659 \begin_layout Description
37660 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37665 \begin_layout Description
37667 \begin_inset space ~
37670 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37672 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37675 For the conversion the program
37684 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37687 \begin_layout Description
37689 \begin_inset space ~
37692 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37693 For the conversion the program
37702 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37705 \begin_layout Description
37707 \begin_inset space ~
37710 (cropped) the same as
37713 \begin_inset space ~
37718 but with cropped page margins
37721 \begin_layout Description
37725 \begin_inset space ~
37730 PDF-format using the program
37734 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37737 \begin_layout Description
37741 \begin_inset space ~
37745 \begin_inset space ~
37753 \begin_inset space ~
37758 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37763 \begin_inset space \space{}
37766 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37770 \begin_layout Description
37774 \begin_inset space ~
37779 PDF-format using the program
37781 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37784 , produces PDF-files directly
37787 \begin_layout Description
37791 \begin_inset space ~
37796 PDF-format using the program
37800 , produces PDF-files directly
37803 \begin_layout Description
37807 \begin_inset space ~
37812 PDF-format using the program
37816 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37819 \begin_layout Description
37823 \begin_inset space ~
37828 PDF-format using the program
37833 , produces PDF-files directly
37836 \begin_layout Description
37840 \begin_inset space ~
37848 \begin_layout Description
37852 \begin_inset space ~
37856 \begin_inset space ~
37861 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37862 and then exported as text using the program
37867 \begin_layout Description
37872 PostScript format using the program
37880 options see section
37881 \begin_inset space ~
37885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37887 reference "subsec:General-output"
37894 \begin_layout Description
37895 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37896 source and also code in the statistical programming
37910 it is possible to use
37914 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37918 \begin_layout Standard
37919 If one of the menu entries
37926 \begin_inset space ~
37935 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37937 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37939 \begin_inset space ~
37943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37945 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37950 \begin_inset Index idx
37953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37954 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37963 \begin_layout Subsection
37967 \begin_layout Standard
37968 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37969 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37972 \begin_inset space ~
37976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37978 reference "sec:Paths"
37983 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37992 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37993 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37994 's preferences as described in section
37995 \begin_inset space ~
37999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38001 reference "subsec:Converters"
38008 \begin_layout Subsection
38009 New and Close Window
38012 \begin_layout Standard
38013 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
38017 \begin_layout Subsection
38021 \begin_layout Standard
38022 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38025 \begin_layout Section
38027 \begin_inset Index idx
38030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38039 \begin_layout Subsection
38043 \begin_layout Standard
38044 Described in section
38045 \begin_inset space ~
38049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38051 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
38058 \begin_layout Subsection
38059 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
38062 \begin_layout Standard
38063 Described in section
38064 \begin_inset space ~
38068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38070 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38077 \begin_layout Subsection
38081 \begin_layout Standard
38082 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
38083 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38086 \begin_layout Subsection
38090 \begin_layout Standard
38091 Selects the whole document.
38094 \begin_layout Subsection
38095 Find & Replace (Quick)
38098 \begin_layout Standard
38099 Described in section
38100 \begin_inset space ~
38104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38106 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38113 \begin_layout Subsection
38114 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38117 \begin_layout Standard
38118 Described in section
38119 \begin_inset space ~
38123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38125 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38132 \begin_layout Subsection
38133 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38136 \begin_layout Standard
38137 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38141 \begin_layout Subsection
38145 \begin_layout Standard
38146 Described in section
38147 \begin_inset space ~
38151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38153 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38160 \begin_layout Subsection
38162 \begin_inset Index idx
38165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38166 Paragraph ! Settings
38174 \begin_layout Standard
38175 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38176 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38180 \begin_layout Standard
38181 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38182 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38188 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38189 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38191 \begin_inset space ~
38199 \begin_layout Subsection
38200 Table and Rows & Columns
38203 \begin_layout Standard
38204 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38205 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38206 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38209 \begin_layout Subsection
38213 \begin_layout Standard
38214 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38215 It will dissolve this inset.
38216 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38220 \begin_layout Subsection
38224 \begin_layout Standard
38225 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38226 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38229 \begin_layout Subsection
38230 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38233 \begin_layout Standard
38234 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38236 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38237 \begin_inset space ~
38241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38243 reference "sec:Nesting"
38248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38250 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38257 \begin_layout Subsection
38260 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38263 \begin_layout Standard
38264 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38265 nts of the same type.
38267 \begin_inset space ~
38271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38273 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38277 for an explanation.
38280 \begin_layout Section
38282 \begin_inset Index idx
38285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38294 \begin_layout Standard
38295 At the bottom of the
38299 menu the opened documents are listed.
38302 \begin_layout Subsection
38303 Open/Close all Insets
38306 \begin_layout Standard
38307 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38310 \begin_layout Subsection
38311 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38314 \begin_layout Standard
38315 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38318 \begin_layout Standard
38319 Math macros are described in the
38326 \begin_layout Subsection
38330 \begin_layout Standard
38331 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38332 \begin_inset space ~
38336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38338 reference "sec:Navigating"
38343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38345 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38352 \begin_layout Subsection
38356 \begin_layout Standard
38357 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38359 \begin_inset space ~
38363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38365 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38372 \begin_layout Subsection
38376 \begin_layout Standard
38377 Opens a window showing console messages.
38378 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38383 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38384 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38385 is processing the document.
38388 \begin_layout Subsection
38390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38392 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38397 \begin_inset Index idx
38400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38409 \begin_layout Standard
38410 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38411 All toolbars and the
38414 \begin_inset space ~
38419 can be turned on and off.
38424 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38436 \begin_inset space ~
38448 \begin_inset space ~
38453 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38457 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38464 \begin_layout Standard
38469 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38473 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38474 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38475 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38476 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38477 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38480 \begin_layout Standard
38482 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38483 \begin_inset space ~
38487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38489 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38496 \begin_layout Subsection
38500 \begin_layout Standard
38504 \begin_inset space ~
38508 \begin_inset space ~
38512 \begin_inset space ~
38516 \begin_inset space ~
38520 \begin_inset space ~
38524 \begin_inset space ~
38529 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38530 's main window vertically while
38533 \begin_inset space ~
38537 \begin_inset space ~
38541 \begin_inset space ~
38545 \begin_inset space ~
38549 \begin_inset space ~
38553 \begin_inset space ~
38558 will split it horizontally.
38559 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38560 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38561 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38562 three or more documents at the same time.
38563 To close a split view, use the menu
38566 \begin_inset space ~
38570 \begin_inset space ~
38578 \begin_layout Subsection
38582 \begin_layout Standard
38583 Closes a split view.
38586 \begin_layout Subsection
38590 \begin_layout Standard
38591 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38592 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38593 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38594 's main window fullscreen.
38595 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38596 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38599 \begin_layout Section
38601 \begin_inset Index idx
38604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38613 \begin_layout Subsection
38617 \begin_layout Standard
38618 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38619 \begin_inset space ~
38623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38625 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38636 \begin_layout Subsection
38638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38640 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38647 \begin_layout Standard
38648 Here you can insert the following characters:
38651 \begin_layout Description
38656 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38659 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38660 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38661 -packages you have installed.
38662 You can get a complete display by checking
38665 \begin_inset space ~
38671 \begin_inset Newline newline
38675 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38683 Not all characters will be visible in the
38687 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38688 dialog (see section
38689 \begin_inset space ~
38693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38695 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38699 ) can display every character.
38707 \begin_layout Description
38708 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38712 \begin_layout Description
38714 \begin_inset space ~
38718 \begin_inset space ~
38721 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38722 \begin_inset space ~
38726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38728 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38735 \begin_layout Description
38737 \begin_inset space ~
38740 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38743 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38744 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38750 \begin_layout Description
38752 \begin_inset space ~
38755 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38758 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38759 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38765 \begin_layout Description
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38770 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38774 \begin_layout Description
38776 \begin_inset space ~
38779 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38783 \begin_layout Description
38785 \begin_inset space ~
38788 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38794 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38800 \begin_layout Description
38802 \begin_inset space ~
38805 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38809 \begin_layout Description
38811 \begin_inset space ~
38815 \begin_inset Index idx
38818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38825 \begin_inset Index idx
38828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38829 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38834 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38835 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38837 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38843 \begin_inset Index idx
38846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38854 \begin_inset Newline newline
38857 More information about this feature can be found in the
38863 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38869 \begin_layout Description
38870 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38872 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38873 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38877 \begin_layout Subsection
38881 \begin_layout Standard
38882 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38885 \begin_layout Description
38886 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38887 \begin_inset script superscript
38889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38898 \begin_layout Description
38899 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38900 \begin_inset script subscript
38902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38911 \begin_layout Description
38913 \begin_inset space ~
38916 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38917 \begin_inset space ~
38921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38923 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38930 \begin_layout Description
38932 \begin_inset space ~
38935 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38936 \begin_inset space ~
38940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38942 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38949 \begin_layout Description
38951 \begin_inset space ~
38954 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38955 \begin_inset space ~
38959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38961 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38968 \begin_layout Description
38970 \begin_inset space ~
38973 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38979 \begin_inset space \space{}
38982 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38983 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38992 To insert a fraction use the command
38997 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39001 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
39007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39010 The visible space is hereby the character before the
39017 \begin_layout Description
39019 \begin_inset space ~
39022 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
39023 \begin_inset space ~
39027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39029 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
39036 \begin_layout Description
39038 \begin_inset space ~
39041 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
39042 \begin_inset space ~
39046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39048 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
39055 \begin_layout Description
39057 \begin_inset space ~
39060 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
39061 \begin_inset space ~
39065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39067 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
39074 \begin_layout Description
39075 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39082 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
39089 \begin_layout Description
39091 \begin_inset space ~
39094 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
39095 \begin_inset space ~
39099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39101 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
39108 \begin_layout Description
39110 \begin_inset space ~
39113 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
39114 \begin_inset space ~
39118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39120 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
39127 \begin_layout Description
39129 \begin_inset space ~
39133 \begin_inset space ~
39136 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39137 \begin_inset space ~
39141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39143 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39150 \begin_layout Description
39152 \begin_inset space ~
39155 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39156 as described in section
39157 \begin_inset space ~
39161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39163 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39170 \begin_layout Description
39172 \begin_inset space ~
39175 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39176 \begin_inset space ~
39180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39182 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39189 \begin_layout Description
39191 \begin_inset space ~
39194 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39195 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39197 \begin_inset space ~
39201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39203 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39210 \begin_layout Description
39212 \begin_inset space ~
39215 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39216 \begin_inset space ~
39220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39222 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39229 \begin_layout Description
39231 \begin_inset space ~
39235 \begin_inset space ~
39238 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39239 \begin_inset space ~
39243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39245 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39252 \begin_layout Subsection
39256 \begin_layout Standard
39257 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39261 \begin_inset space ~
39282 are described in section
39283 \begin_inset space ~
39287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39289 reference "sec:toc"
39298 is described in section
39299 \begin_inset space ~
39303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39305 reference "sec:Index"
39313 is described in section
39314 \begin_inset space ~
39318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39320 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39326 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39329 is described in section
39330 \begin_inset space ~
39334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39336 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39343 \begin_layout Subsection
39347 \begin_layout Standard
39348 To insert floats, as described in section
39349 \begin_inset space ~
39353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39355 reference "sec:Floats"
39359 and in detail the chapter
39366 \begin_inset space ~
39374 \begin_layout Subsection
39378 \begin_layout Standard
39379 To insert notes, described in section
39380 \begin_inset space ~
39384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39386 reference "sec:Notes"
39393 \begin_layout Subsection
39397 \begin_layout Standard
39398 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39400 Branches are described in section
39401 \begin_inset space ~
39405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39407 reference "sec:Branches"
39414 \begin_layout Subsection
39418 \begin_layout Standard
39419 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39420 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39422 An example is the document class
39423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39430 with three custom insets.
39433 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39437 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39443 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39446 \begin_layout Subsection
39448 \begin_inset Index idx
39451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39460 \begin_layout Standard
39461 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39463 For more information see chapter
39465 External Document Parts
39468 \begin_inset space ~
39474 \begin_layout Subsection
39476 \begin_inset Index idx
39479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39488 \begin_layout Standard
39489 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39490 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39497 \begin_inset space ~
39505 \begin_layout Subsection
39509 \begin_layout Standard
39514 dialog as described in section
39515 \begin_inset space ~
39519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39521 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39528 \begin_layout Subsection
39532 \begin_layout Standard
39537 as described in section
39538 \begin_inset space ~
39542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39544 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39551 \begin_layout Subsection
39555 \begin_layout Standard
39560 as described in section
39561 \begin_inset space ~
39565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39567 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39574 \begin_layout Subsection
39576 \begin_inset Index idx
39579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39586 \begin_inset Index idx
39589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39590 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39598 \begin_layout Standard
39599 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39600 Floats are described in section
39601 \begin_inset space ~
39605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39607 reference "sec:Floats"
39611 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39613 Multi-page Captions
39618 \begin_inset space ~
39626 \begin_layout Subsection
39630 \begin_layout Standard
39631 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39632 \begin_inset space ~
39636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39638 reference "sec:Index"
39645 \begin_layout Subsection
39649 \begin_layout Standard
39650 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39651 \begin_inset space ~
39655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39657 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39664 \begin_layout Subsection
39668 \begin_layout Standard
39669 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39670 Tables are described in section
39671 \begin_inset space ~
39675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39677 reference "sec:Tables"
39681 and in detail in the chapter
39688 \begin_inset space ~
39696 \begin_layout Subsection
39700 \begin_layout Standard
39706 Graphics are described in section
39707 \begin_inset space ~
39711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39713 reference "sec:Graphics"
39720 \begin_layout Subsection
39724 \begin_layout Standard
39725 Inserts a URL as described in section
39726 \begin_inset space ~
39730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39732 reference "subsec:URLs"
39739 \begin_layout Subsection
39743 \begin_layout Standard
39744 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39745 \begin_inset space ~
39749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39751 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39758 \begin_layout Subsection
39762 \begin_layout Standard
39763 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39764 \begin_inset space ~
39768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39770 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39777 \begin_layout Subsection
39781 \begin_layout Standard
39782 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39783 \begin_inset space ~
39787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39789 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39796 \begin_layout Subsection
39800 \begin_layout Standard
39801 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39802 title or caption of a float.
39803 Inserts a short title as described in section
39804 \begin_inset space ~
39808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39810 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39817 \begin_layout Subsection
39822 \begin_layout Standard
39823 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39824 Code box as described in section
39825 \begin_inset space ~
39829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39831 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39838 \begin_layout Subsection
39840 \begin_inset Index idx
39843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39852 \begin_layout Standard
39853 Inserts a program listings box.
39854 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39856 Program Code Listings
39861 \begin_inset space ~
39869 \begin_layout Subsection
39873 \begin_layout Standard
39874 Inserts the actual date.
39875 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39879 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39887 \begin_inset space ~
39895 \begin_layout Subsection
39899 \begin_layout Standard
39900 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39901 \begin_inset space ~
39905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39907 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39914 \begin_layout Section
39916 \begin_inset Index idx
39919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39928 \begin_layout Standard
39929 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39930 \begin_inset space ~
39933 of the current document.
39934 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39937 \begin_layout Subsection
39941 \begin_layout Standard
39942 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39943 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39944 to jump, for example, between section
39945 \begin_inset space ~
39949 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39950 \begin_inset space ~
39953 2.5 and use the submenu
39956 \begin_inset space ~
39960 \begin_inset space ~
39967 \begin_inset space ~
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39977 \begin_inset space ~
39983 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39987 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39993 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39996 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39999 \begin_layout Standard
40000 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40009 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
40012 \begin_inset space ~
40017 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
40020 \begin_layout Subsection
40021 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
40024 \begin_layout Standard
40025 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
40029 \begin_layout Subsection
40033 \begin_layout Standard
40034 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
40035 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
40036 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
40040 \begin_inset space ~
40044 \begin_inset space ~
40052 \begin_layout Subsection
40056 \begin_layout Standard
40057 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
40060 The \SpecialChar LyX
40061 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
40063 \begin_inset space ~
40071 \begin_inset space ~
40076 manual for a detailed description.
40079 \begin_layout Section
40081 \begin_inset Index idx
40084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40093 \begin_layout Subsection
40097 \begin_layout Standard
40098 Change Tracking is described in section
40099 \begin_inset space ~
40103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40105 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40112 \begin_layout Subsection
40120 \begin_layout Standard
40121 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40122 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40123 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40125 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40126 to the clipboard or update the view.
40127 \begin_inset Newline newline
40130 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40134 \begin_layout Standard
40137 Open Containing Directory
40139 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40140 's temporary folder for the document.
40141 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40142 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40143 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40144 For example some journals require to send the
40148 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40152 \begin_layout Subsection
40153 Start Appendix Here
40156 \begin_layout Standard
40157 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40158 as described in section
40159 \begin_inset space ~
40163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40165 reference "sec:Appendices"
40172 \begin_layout Subsection
40174 \begin_inset space ~
40180 \begin_layout Standard
40181 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40182 default output format for the document (menu
40184 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40185 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40186 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40192 \begin_inset space ~
40198 \begin_inset space ~
40202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40204 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40208 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40211 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40212 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40214 \begin_inset space ~
40217 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40219 \begin_inset space ~
40222 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40224 \begin_inset space ~
40228 \begin_inset space ~
40234 \begin_inset space ~
40238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40240 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40244 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40245 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40247 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40248 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40250 \begin_inset space ~
40253 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40258 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40262 \begin_inset space ~
40266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40268 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40273 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40274 when it is first configured.
40275 The default output format is
40278 \begin_inset space ~
40286 \begin_layout Subsection
40287 View (Other Formats)
40290 \begin_layout Standard
40291 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40292 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40293 actual document with an external program.
40294 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40295 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40296 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40298 All possible formats are listed in section
40299 \begin_inset space ~
40303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40305 reference "subsec:Export"
40310 You should at least see the menu entry
40315 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40317 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40319 \begin_inset space ~
40323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40325 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40330 \begin_inset Index idx
40333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40334 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40343 \begin_layout Standard
40344 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40345 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40347 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40348 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40350 \begin_inset space ~
40353 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40358 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40362 \begin_inset space ~
40366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40368 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40373 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40374 when it is first configured.
40377 \begin_layout Subsection
40379 \begin_inset space ~
40385 \begin_layout Standard
40386 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40387 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40390 \begin_layout Subsection
40391 Update (Other Formats)
40394 \begin_layout Standard
40395 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40396 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40399 \begin_layout Subsection
40400 View Master Document
40403 \begin_layout Standard
40404 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40420 \begin_inset space ~
40425 manual for more information on this topic).
40426 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40427 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40435 \begin_inset space ~
40440 generates the output of the whole book, while
40444 will just output the chapter alone.
40447 \begin_layout Standard
40448 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40449 in the document settings (menu
40451 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40452 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40453 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40459 \begin_inset space ~
40465 \begin_inset space ~
40469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40471 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40475 ) or in the preferences (menu
40477 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40478 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40483 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40485 \begin_inset space ~
40488 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40494 \begin_inset space ~
40500 \begin_inset space ~
40504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40506 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40513 \begin_layout Subsection
40514 Update Master Document
40517 \begin_layout Standard
40518 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40534 \begin_inset space ~
40539 manual for more information on this topic).
40540 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40541 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40544 \begin_layout Standard
40545 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40546 in the document settings (menu
40548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40549 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40550 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40552 \begin_inset space ~
40556 \begin_inset space ~
40562 \begin_inset space ~
40566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40568 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40572 ) or in the preferences (menu
40574 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40575 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40577 \begin_inset space ~
40580 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40582 \begin_inset space ~
40585 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40587 \begin_inset space ~
40591 \begin_inset space ~
40597 \begin_inset space ~
40601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40603 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40610 \begin_layout Subsection
40612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40614 name "subsec:Compressed"
40621 \begin_layout Standard
40622 Un/compresses the current document.
40623 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40624 compression (see the
40626 Additional Features
40628 manual for details).
40631 \begin_layout Subsection
40635 \begin_layout Standard
40636 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40639 \begin_layout Subsection
40643 \begin_layout Standard
40644 The document settings are described in appendix
40645 \begin_inset space ~
40649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40651 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40658 \begin_layout Section
40660 \begin_inset Index idx
40663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40672 \begin_layout Subsection
40676 \begin_layout Standard
40677 Spell checking is explained in section
40678 \begin_inset space ~
40682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40684 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40691 \begin_layout Subsection
40695 \begin_layout Standard
40696 The thesaurus is described in section
40697 \begin_inset space ~
40701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40703 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40710 \begin_layout Subsection
40712 \begin_inset Index idx
40715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40722 \begin_inset Index idx
40725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40734 \begin_layout Standard
40735 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40736 the highlighted document part.
40739 \begin_layout Subsection
40745 \begin_inset Index idx
40748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40749 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40758 \begin_layout Standard
40759 Generates with the help of the program
40761 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40764 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40765 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40766 This feature is not available on Windows.
40769 \begin_layout Subsection
40775 \begin_inset Index idx
40778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40788 \begin_layout Standard
40789 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40794 \begin_inset space ~
40799 to see the full filename paths.
40802 \begin_layout Subsection
40804 \begin_inset Index idx
40807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40816 \begin_layout Standard
40817 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40818 files as described in section
40819 \begin_inset space ~
40823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40825 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40832 \begin_layout Subsection
40834 \begin_inset Index idx
40837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40850 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40868 \begin_inset Index idx
40871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40872 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40881 \begin_layout Standard
40882 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40883 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40884 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40885 -packages and programs it needs; see
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40893 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40900 \begin_layout Subsection
40904 \begin_layout Standard
40909 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40910 \begin_inset space ~
40914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40916 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40923 \begin_layout Section
40925 \begin_inset Index idx
40928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40937 \begin_layout Standard
40938 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40939 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40941 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40945 \begin_layout Standard
40949 \begin_inset space ~
40954 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40955 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40956 packages and classes found
40957 by \SpecialChar LyX
40959 \begin_inset space ~
40963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40965 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40972 \begin_layout Standard
40976 \begin_inset space ~
40981 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40986 \begin_layout Section
40988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40990 name "sec:Toolbars"
40997 \begin_layout Standard
40998 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40999 \begin_inset space ~
41003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41005 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
41012 \begin_layout Standard
41013 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
41014 This is described in the
41016 Additional Features
41021 \begin_layout Subsection
41023 \begin_inset Index idx
41026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41035 \begin_layout Standard
41036 \begin_inset Graphics
41037 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
41045 \begin_layout Standard
41046 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41052 \begin_layout Standard
41053 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41070 \begin_inset Note Note
41073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41074 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41079 manual for more information.
41087 \begin_layout Standard
41088 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41094 \begin_layout Standard
41095 \begin_inset Tabular
41096 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41097 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41098 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41099 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41105 \begin_inset Graphics
41106 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41120 pull-down box for the environments
41133 \begin_layout Standard
41134 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41140 \begin_layout Standard
41142 \begin_inset Tabular
41143 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41144 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41145 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41146 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41147 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41170 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41177 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41200 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41207 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41230 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41237 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41246 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41260 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41267 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41276 arg "spelling-continuously"
41284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41288 Spellcheck continuously
41294 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41317 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41347 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41377 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41384 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41407 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41414 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41437 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41444 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41453 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41467 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41486 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41493 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41526 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41535 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41549 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41550 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41578 Emphasize text, function of the
41580 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41582 \begin_inset space ~
41585 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41615 Set text to noun style, function of the
41617 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41619 \begin_inset space ~
41622 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41631 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41640 arg "textstyle-apply"
41648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41652 Format text using the current settings in the
41654 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41656 \begin_inset space ~
41659 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41668 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41692 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41694 \begin_inset space ~
41703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41712 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41740 arg "tabular-insert"
41748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41770 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41782 Toggle outline window on/off,
41784 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41800 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41812 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41827 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41839 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41852 \begin_layout Subsection
41854 \begin_inset Index idx
41857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41866 \begin_layout Standard
41867 \begin_inset Graphics
41868 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41876 \begin_layout Standard
41877 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41883 \begin_layout Standard
41884 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41888 \begin_layout Standard
41889 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41895 \begin_layout Standard
41896 \begin_inset Tabular
41897 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41898 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41899 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41900 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41928 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41937 arg "layout Enumerate"
41945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41964 arg "layout Itemize"
41972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42018 arg "layout Description"
42026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42045 arg "depth-increment"
42053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42059 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42061 \begin_inset space ~
42065 \begin_inset space ~
42074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42083 arg "depth-decrement"
42091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42097 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42099 \begin_inset space ~
42103 \begin_inset space ~
42112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42121 arg "float-insert figure"
42129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42136 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42143 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42152 arg "float-insert table"
42160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42167 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42174 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42213 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42227 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42243 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42264 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42287 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42289 \begin_inset space ~
42298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42307 arg "nomencl-insert"
42315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42321 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42323 \begin_inset space ~
42332 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42341 arg "footnote-insert"
42349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42355 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42371 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42385 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42387 \begin_inset space ~
42396 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42420 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42422 \begin_inset space ~
42431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42440 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42454 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42491 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42514 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42516 \begin_inset space ~
42525 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42534 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42549 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42556 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42565 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42579 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42580 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42582 \begin_inset space ~
42591 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42600 arg "dialog-show character"
42608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42614 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42619 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42626 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42635 arg "layout-paragraph"
42643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42649 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42651 \begin_inset space ~
42660 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42669 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42683 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42697 \begin_layout Subsection
42698 View/Update Toolbar
42699 \begin_inset Index idx
42702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42703 Toolbar ! View / Update
42711 \begin_layout Standard
42712 \begin_inset Graphics
42713 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42720 \begin_layout Standard
42721 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42727 \begin_layout Standard
42728 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42739 \begin_layout Standard
42740 \begin_inset Tabular
42741 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42742 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42743 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42744 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42745 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42768 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42775 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42784 arg "buffer-update"
42792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42798 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42814 arg "master-buffer-view"
42822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42828 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42830 \begin_inset space ~
42839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42848 arg "master-buffer-update"
42856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42862 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42864 \begin_inset space ~
42868 \begin_inset space ~
42877 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42886 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42901 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42902 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42903 Synchronize with Output
42909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42932 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42933 View (Other Formats)
42939 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42946 arg "update-others"
42954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42961 Update (Other Formats)
42974 \begin_layout Standard
42975 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42979 \begin_layout Subsection
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42984 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42985 \begin_inset space ~
42989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42991 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42995 , the table toolbar
42996 \begin_inset Index idx
42999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43008 \begin_inset space ~
43013 manual and the math macro toolbar
43014 \begin_inset Index idx
43017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43030 \begin_layout Chapter
43031 The Document Settings
43032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43034 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43039 \begin_inset Index idx
43042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43043 Document ! Settings
43051 \begin_layout Standard
43055 \begin_inset space ~
43060 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
43061 is called with the menu
43063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43067 You can save your document settings as default with the
43069 Save as Document Defaults
43071 button in any dialog.
43072 This will create a template named
43076 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
43077 when you create a new document without
43081 \begin_layout Standard
43086 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43087 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43090 \begin_layout Standard
43091 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43092 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
43093 to find the one you are looking for.
43094 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
43095 the submenus of the dialog.
43097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43101 \begin_inset space \space{}
43105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43112 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43113 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43114 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43117 \begin_layout Section
43121 \begin_layout Standard
43122 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43124 Document classes are described in section
43125 \begin_inset space ~
43129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43131 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43139 \begin_layout Standard
43143 \begin_inset space ~
43148 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43153 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43154 as a layout for a document class.
43155 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43157 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43166 \begin_layout Standard
43167 Some classes use special class options by default.
43168 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43172 and you can decide to use them or not.
43173 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43174 recommended you leave them untouched.
43179 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43180 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43185 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43187 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43193 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43194 \begin_inset Newline newline
43199 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43202 \begin_inset Newline newline
43205 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43206 distribution, see section
43211 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43213 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43226 \begin_layout Standard
43231 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43232 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43233 in the background if the child document
43234 is opened without its master.
43235 This way child documents are always compilable.
43236 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43243 \begin_inset space ~
43251 \begin_layout Standard
43252 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43263 \begin_inset Index idx
43266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43268 -packages ! prettyref
43274 \begin_inset Index idx
43277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43279 -packages ! refstyle
43284 for cross-references, see section
43285 \begin_inset space ~
43289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43291 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43298 \begin_layout Section
43302 \begin_layout Standard
43303 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43304 Please refer to the section
43307 \begin_inset space ~
43315 \begin_inset space ~
43320 manual for details.
43323 \begin_layout Section
43327 \begin_layout Standard
43328 Modules are explained in section
43329 \begin_inset space ~
43333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43335 reference "subsec:Modules"
43342 \begin_layout Section
43346 \begin_layout Standard
43348 \begin_inset space ~
43352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43354 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43361 \begin_layout Section
43365 \begin_layout Standard
43366 The document font settings are described in section
43367 \begin_inset space ~
43371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43373 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43380 \begin_layout Section
43384 \begin_layout Standard
43385 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43397 \begin_inset space ~
43402 and whether it should be a
43405 \begin_inset space ~
43410 can also be specified here.
43413 \begin_layout Standard
43414 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43415 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43416 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43418 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43421 \begin_layout Standard
43424 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43427 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43428 justifies the text on screen.
43429 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43433 \begin_layout Section
43437 \begin_layout Standard
43438 This dialog is described in sections
43439 \begin_inset space ~
43443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43445 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43452 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43459 \begin_layout Section
43463 \begin_layout Standard
43464 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43471 reference "subsec:Margins"
43478 \begin_layout Section
43480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43482 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43487 \begin_inset Index idx
43490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43491 Language ! Encoding
43499 \begin_layout Standard
43500 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43501 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43502 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43504 is always encoded in utf8).
43505 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43506 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43507 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43508 -command is not known for
43509 a particular character).
43512 \begin_layout Standard
43513 If you use the option
43518 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43519 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43520 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43522 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43523 exactly one encoding.
43524 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43527 \begin_layout Standard
43529 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43530 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43531 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43532 installation supports Unicode), choose
43533 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43534 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43535 is quite incomplete, so
43536 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43541 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43542 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43543 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43544 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43545 -commands is not used, because all
43546 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43547 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43548 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43549 , two new alternative engines
43550 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43552 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43554 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43557 \begin_inset space ~
43565 \begin_inset space ~
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43579 \begin_inset space ~
43583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43585 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43590 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43594 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43597 \begin_layout Standard
43601 \begin_inset space ~
43606 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43607 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43617 The possible settings are:
43620 \begin_layout Description
43621 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43623 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43624 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43628 \begin_inset space ~
43632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43634 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43641 \begin_layout Description
43642 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43643 format you will use.
43644 In many cases this will be
43649 \begin_inset Index idx
43652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43660 If the newer package
43665 \begin_inset Index idx
43668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43670 -packages ! polyglossia
43675 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43676 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43677 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43679 this package will be used instead of
43686 \begin_layout Description
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43699 would be more appropriate.
43702 \begin_layout Description
43703 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43704 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43708 (for German texts), type in
43711 \begin_inset Newline newline
43716 usepackage{ngerman}
43719 \begin_layout Description
43720 None will not use a language package.
43721 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43724 \begin_layout Standard
43725 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43728 \begin_layout Description
43730 \begin_inset space ~
43734 \begin_inset space ~
43738 \begin_inset space ~
43745 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43751 \begin_inset Index idx
43754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43756 -packages ! inputenc
43762 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43763 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43764 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43768 \begin_layout Description
43769 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43771 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43772 commands, which may result in a big
43773 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43774 -commands are needed.
43777 \begin_layout Description
43779 \begin_inset space ~
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43786 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43789 \begin_layout Description
43791 \begin_inset space ~
43795 \begin_inset space ~
43798 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43801 \begin_layout Description
43803 \begin_inset space ~
43806 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43809 \begin_layout Description
43811 \begin_inset space ~
43815 \begin_inset space ~
43818 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43819 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43822 \begin_layout Description
43824 \begin_inset space ~
43828 \begin_inset space ~
43831 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43835 \begin_layout Description
43837 \begin_inset space ~
43841 \begin_inset space ~
43844 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43845 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43848 \begin_layout Description
43850 \begin_inset space ~
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43858 \begin_inset space ~
43861 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43862 \begin_inset space ~
43868 \begin_layout Description
43870 \begin_inset space ~
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43878 \begin_inset space ~
43881 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43882 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43885 \begin_layout Description
43887 \begin_inset space ~
43891 \begin_inset space ~
43894 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43895 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43896 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43897 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43898 \begin_inset space ~
43902 \begin_inset space ~
43908 \begin_layout Description
43910 \begin_inset space ~
43914 \begin_inset space ~
43917 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43918 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43919 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43921 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43922 \begin_inset space ~
43926 \begin_inset space ~
43932 \begin_layout Description
43934 \begin_inset space ~
43938 \begin_inset space ~
43941 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43944 \begin_layout Description
43946 \begin_inset space ~
43950 \begin_inset space ~
43953 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43956 \begin_layout Description
43958 \begin_inset space ~
43962 \begin_inset space ~
43965 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43968 \begin_layout Description
43970 \begin_inset space ~
43973 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43976 \begin_layout Description
43978 \begin_inset space ~
43981 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43984 \begin_layout Description
43986 \begin_inset space ~
43990 \begin_inset space ~
43993 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43996 \begin_layout Description
43998 \begin_inset space ~
44002 \begin_inset space ~
44008 \begin_layout Description
44010 \begin_inset space ~
44014 \begin_inset space ~
44017 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
44020 \begin_layout Description
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44026 \begin_inset space ~
44032 \begin_layout Description
44034 \begin_inset space ~
44038 \begin_inset space ~
44041 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44047 \begin_inset Index idx
44050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44057 , when using this, set the document language to
44062 \begin_layout Description
44064 \begin_inset space ~
44068 \begin_inset space ~
44071 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44076 , when using this, set the document language to
44079 \begin_inset space ~
44085 \begin_layout Description
44087 \begin_inset space ~
44091 \begin_inset space ~
44094 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44100 \begin_inset Index idx
44103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44105 -packages ! japanese
44110 , when using this, set the document language to
44115 \begin_layout Description
44117 \begin_inset space ~
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44124 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44129 , when using this, set the document language to
44134 \begin_layout Description
44136 \begin_inset space ~
44140 \begin_inset space ~
44143 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44148 , when using this, set the document language to
44153 \begin_layout Description
44155 \begin_inset space ~
44158 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44161 \begin_layout Description
44163 \begin_inset space ~
44167 \begin_inset space ~
44171 \begin_inset space ~
44174 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44177 \begin_layout Description
44179 \begin_inset space ~
44183 \begin_inset space ~
44187 \begin_inset space ~
44190 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44191 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44192 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44195 \begin_layout Description
44197 \begin_inset space ~
44201 \begin_inset space ~
44207 \begin_layout Description
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44213 \begin_inset space ~
44216 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44217 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44220 \begin_layout Description
44222 \begin_inset space ~
44226 \begin_inset space ~
44229 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44235 \begin_inset Index idx
44238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44245 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44248 \begin_layout Description
44250 \begin_inset space ~
44258 \begin_inset space ~
44261 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44268 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44271 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44278 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44279 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44281 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44284 \begin_layout Description
44286 \begin_inset space ~
44290 \begin_inset space ~
44293 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44299 \begin_inset Index idx
44302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44309 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44312 \begin_layout Description
44314 \begin_inset space ~
44317 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44323 \begin_inset Index idx
44326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44328 -packages ! inputenc
44334 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44338 \begin_layout Description
44340 \begin_inset space ~
44344 \begin_inset space ~
44348 \begin_inset space ~
44351 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44352 \begin_inset space ~
44358 \begin_layout Description
44360 \begin_inset space ~
44364 \begin_inset space ~
44368 \begin_inset space ~
44371 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44372 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44373 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44377 \begin_layout Description
44379 \begin_inset space ~
44383 \begin_inset space ~
44387 \begin_inset space ~
44390 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44391 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44394 \begin_layout Section
44396 \begin_inset Index idx
44399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44406 \begin_inset Index idx
44409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44416 \begin_inset Index idx
44419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44420 Color ! Shaded boxes
44426 \begin_inset Index idx
44429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44430 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44438 \begin_layout Standard
44439 Here you can alter the font color for the
44443 (default: black), for
44446 \begin_inset space ~
44451 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44455 (default: white) and for
44458 \begin_inset space ~
44468 sets the color back to the default.
44471 \begin_layout Standard
44472 Clicking any button showing
44480 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44481 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44482 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44483 later more quickly.
44486 \begin_layout Standard
44487 Note, if you change the
44490 \begin_inset space ~
44495 font color and use the option
44498 \begin_inset space ~
44503 in the document settings under
44506 \begin_inset space ~
44511 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44512 \begin_inset space ~
44516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44518 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44525 \begin_layout Standard
44526 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44532 \begin_layout Standard
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44545 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44548 \begin_inset space ~
44551 Code after a forced page break:
44554 \begin_layout Itemize
44555 For the page color:
44556 \begin_inset Newline newline
44563 pagecolor{color name}
44566 \begin_layout Itemize
44567 For the text color:
44568 \begin_inset Newline newline
44578 \begin_layout Standard
44579 You are restricted to one of
44615 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44622 \begin_inset space ~
44628 \begin_inset Newline newline
44631 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44632 names to refer to them:
44635 \begin_layout Itemize
44641 \begin_inset Newline newline
44646 page_backgroundcolor
44649 \begin_layout Itemize
44653 \begin_inset space ~
44659 \begin_inset Newline newline
44667 \begin_layout Itemize
44671 \begin_inset space ~
44677 \begin_inset Newline newline
44685 \begin_layout Itemize
44689 \begin_inset space ~
44695 \begin_inset Newline newline
44703 \begin_layout Standard
44704 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44707 \begin_inset space ~
44715 \begin_inset space ~
44723 \begin_layout Section
44727 \begin_layout Standard
44728 Here you can adjust the
44732 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44736 as described in section
44737 \begin_inset space ~
44741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44743 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44750 \begin_layout Section
44754 \begin_layout Standard
44755 Here you can specify if a
44756 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887883
44759 citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44761 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887840
44767 \begin_inset Index idx
44770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44772 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887846
44774 -packages ! biblatex
44786 \begin_inset Index idx
44789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44801 \begin_inset Index idx
44804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44806 -packages ! jurabib
44813 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887869
44814 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44816 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887870
44821 Sectioned bibliography
44823 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44829 \begin_inset Index idx
44832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44834 -packages ! bibtopic
44840 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887945
44842 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44847 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887949
44849 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887950
44853 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887962
44860 for the generation of the bibliography.
44861 For a further description
44862 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887970
44866 \begin_inset space ~
44870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44872 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44879 \begin_layout Section
44883 \begin_layout Standard
44884 Here you can define the
44888 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44890 \begin_inset space ~
44894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44896 reference "sec:Index"
44903 \begin_layout Section
44907 \begin_layout Standard
44908 The PDF properties are explained in section
44909 \begin_inset space ~
44913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44915 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44922 \begin_layout Section
44926 \begin_layout Standard
44927 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44928 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44934 \begin_inset Index idx
44937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44939 -packages ! amsmath
44949 \begin_inset Index idx
44952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44954 -packages ! amssymb
44964 \begin_inset Index idx
44967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44979 \begin_inset Index idx
44982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44994 \begin_inset Index idx
44997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44999 -packages ! mathdots
45009 \begin_inset Index idx
45012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45014 -packages ! mathtools
45024 \begin_inset Index idx
45027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45039 \begin_inset Index idx
45042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45044 -packages ! stackrel
45054 \begin_inset Index idx
45057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45059 -packages ! stmaryrd
45069 \begin_inset Index idx
45072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45074 -packages ! undertilde
45079 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45082 \begin_layout Description
45083 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45084 -errors in formulas,
45085 ensure that you have this enabled.
45088 \begin_layout Description
45089 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
45090 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45091 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
45095 \begin_layout Description
45096 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
45099 \begin_inset space ~
45111 \begin_layout Description
45112 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45115 \begin_inset space ~
45127 \begin_layout Description
45128 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45139 \begin_layout Description
45140 mathtools is used for the math commands
45176 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45183 \begin_layout Description
45184 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45186 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45195 \begin_layout Description
45196 stackrel is used for the math command
45213 \begin_layout Description
45214 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45217 \begin_layout Description
45218 undertilde is used for the math command
45226 Accents for one Character
45235 \begin_layout Section
45239 \begin_layout Standard
45240 The float placement options are described in the section
45243 \begin_inset space ~
45251 \begin_inset space ~
45259 \begin_layout Section
45263 \begin_layout Standard
45264 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45266 Program Code Listings
45271 \begin_inset space ~
45279 \begin_layout Section
45283 \begin_layout Standard
45284 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45292 set to be used and set the
45297 The itemize environment is described in section
45298 \begin_inset space ~
45302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45304 reference "sec:Itemize"
45311 \begin_layout Standard
45312 You can furthermore specify a
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45320 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45321 command of the desired character.
45322 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45329 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45335 \begin_inset space \space{}
45339 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45349 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45350 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45353 \begin_layout Standard
45354 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45362 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45363 -packages in the preamble (menu
45366 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45367 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45370 \begin_inset space ~
45376 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45380 usepackage{textcomp}
45383 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45387 usepackage{amssymb}
45397 \begin_layout Section
45401 \begin_layout Standard
45402 Branches are described in section
45403 \begin_inset space ~
45407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45409 reference "sec:Branches"
45416 \begin_layout Section
45418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45420 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45427 \begin_layout Standard
45428 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45431 \begin_layout Description
45433 \begin_inset space ~
45437 \begin_inset space ~
45440 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45460 View Master Document
45461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45468 Update Master Document
45469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45476 menu or the toolbar.
45477 The default is set in
45479 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45480 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45482 \begin_inset space ~
45485 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45495 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45502 \begin_layout Description
45504 \begin_inset space ~
45508 \begin_inset space ~
45511 Output settings for the menu
45513 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45515 \begin_inset space ~
45521 For a detailed description see section
45523 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45528 \begin_inset space ~
45536 \begin_layout Description
45538 \begin_inset space ~
45542 \begin_inset space ~
45545 Options offers settings for the export format
45553 \begin_inset space ~
45558 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45559 \begin_inset space ~
45562 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45566 \begin_inset space ~
45571 settings are described in detail in section
45573 Math Output in XHTML
45578 \begin_inset space ~
45587 \begin_inset space ~
45591 \begin_inset space ~
45596 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45599 \begin_layout Description
45601 \begin_inset space ~
45606 Save transient properties
45608 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45609 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45610 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45614 \begin_layout Itemize
45615 the activation of change tracking
45618 \begin_layout Itemize
45619 the output of tracked changes
45622 \begin_layout Itemize
45623 the recording of the document directory path.
45626 \begin_layout Standard
45627 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45628 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45632 \begin_layout Section
45640 \begin_layout Standard
45641 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45643 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45645 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45647 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45651 \begin_layout Standard
45652 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45653 -syntax is given in section
45654 \begin_inset space ~
45658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45660 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45667 \begin_layout Chapter
45673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45675 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45680 \begin_inset Index idx
45683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45692 \begin_layout Standard
45693 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45695 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45699 It has the following submenus.
45702 \begin_layout Section
45706 \begin_layout Subsection
45710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45711 User Interface File
45712 \begin_inset Index idx
45715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45716 Customization ! of toolbars
45722 \begin_inset Index idx
45725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45726 Customization ! of menus
45734 \begin_layout Standard
45735 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45736 interface (ui) file.
45737 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45745 \begin_layout Description
45750 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45753 \begin_layout Description
45760 the menu entries in popup context menus
45763 \begin_layout Description
45768 specifies the toolbar buttons
45771 \begin_layout Standard
45772 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45773 and edit the entries.
45776 \begin_layout Standard
45777 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45789 entries must be finished with an explicit
45814 and in the case of the
45815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45827 The syntax for the entries is:
45830 \begin_layout Standard
45831 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45860 \begin_layout Standard
45862 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45865 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45866 -functions are listed in the menu
45868 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45870 \begin_inset space ~
45878 \begin_layout Standard
45879 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45885 \begin_layout Standard
45886 For example, assuming you use the menu
45888 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45891 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45895 \begin_layout Standard
45896 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45920 \begin_layout Standard
45922 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45937 to have the sixth bookmark.
45940 \begin_layout Standard
45944 \begin_inset space ~
45949 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45950 's toolbar buttons.
45951 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45952 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45955 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45963 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45967 \begin_layout Standard
45970 Enable tool tips in main work area
45972 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45976 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45980 \begin_layout Standard
45985 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45986 should display in the menu
45988 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45990 \begin_inset space ~
45998 \begin_layout Subsection
46002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46006 \begin_layout Standard
46009 Restore window layouts and geometries
46012 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
46013 the last \SpecialChar LyX
46017 \begin_layout Standard
46020 Restore cursor positions
46022 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
46026 \begin_layout Standard
46029 Load opened files from last session
46031 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
46035 \begin_layout Standard
46038 Clear all session information
46040 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
46041 sessions (cursor positions, names
46042 of last opened documents, etc.).
46045 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46049 name "subsec:Backup documents"
46054 \begin_inset Index idx
46057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46066 \begin_layout Standard
46069 Backup original documents when saving
46071 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
46072 it was saved the last time.
46073 It is stored in the
46076 \begin_inset space ~
46082 \begin_inset space ~
46086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46088 reference "sec:Paths"
46092 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
46095 \begin_inset space ~
46101 The backup file has the file extension
46102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46116 \begin_layout Standard
46119 Backup documents, every
46121 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
46124 \begin_layout Standard
46127 Save documents compressed by default
46129 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
46130 \begin_inset space ~
46134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46136 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46141 This applies to newly created documents only.
46142 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46146 Windows & work area
46149 \begin_layout Standard
46152 Open documents in tabs
46154 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46158 \begin_layout Standard
46163 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46170 \begin_inset space ~
46174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46176 reference "sec:Paths"
46180 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46187 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46188 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46189 of \SpecialChar LyX
46191 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46192 instance is created for each file.
46195 \begin_layout Standard
46198 Single close-tab button
46200 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46210 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46211 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46213 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
46214 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
46220 \begin_layout Standard
46221 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46229 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46230 before the change takes effect.
46238 \begin_layout Standard
46243 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46245 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46247 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46251 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46252 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46253 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46256 \begin_layout Subsection
46258 \begin_inset Index idx
46261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46270 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46277 \begin_layout Standard
46278 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46282 \begin_layout Standard
46283 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46291 This section only deals with the fonts
46295 the \SpecialChar LyX
46297 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46301 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46312 \begin_layout Standard
46313 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46330 (depends on the system) as its
46333 \begin_inset space ~
46349 \begin_layout Standard
46350 You can change the font size with the
46357 \begin_layout Standard
46362 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46367 points have the size of 1
46368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46372 \begin_inset space ~
46376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46378 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46383 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46388 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46389 \begin_inset space ~
46393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46395 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46402 \begin_layout Standard
46405 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46407 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46408 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46409 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46410 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46411 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46413 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46414 \begin_inset space ~
46420 \begin_layout Subsection
46422 \begin_inset Index idx
46425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46426 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46433 \begin_inset Index idx
46436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46445 \begin_layout Standard
46446 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46447 by choosing an item in the
46448 list and selecting the
46455 \begin_layout Standard
46456 By checking the option
46460 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46463 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46464 \begin_inset space ~
46468 \begin_inset space ~
46473 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46476 \begin_layout Subsection
46478 \begin_inset Index idx
46481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46490 \begin_layout Standard
46491 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46495 \begin_layout Standard
46500 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46501 This feature is described in section
46502 \begin_inset space ~
46506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46508 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46515 \begin_layout Standard
46516 Checking the option
46519 \begin_inset space ~
46523 \begin_inset space ~
46527 \begin_inset space ~
46532 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46535 \begin_layout Section
46537 \begin_inset Index idx
46540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46549 \begin_layout Subsection
46553 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46557 \begin_layout Standard
46560 Cursor follows scrollbar
46562 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46566 \begin_layout Standard
46567 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46568 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46569 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46572 \begin_layout Standard
46575 Scroll below end of document
46577 is self-explanatory.
46580 \begin_layout Standard
46581 In \SpecialChar LyX
46582 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46589 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46591 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46592 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46595 \begin_layout Standard
46598 Sort environments alphabetically
46600 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46603 \begin_layout Standard
46606 Group environments by their category
46608 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46611 \begin_layout Standard
46616 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46627 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46631 \begin_layout Standard
46632 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46637 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46638 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46642 \begin_layout Subsection
46644 \begin_inset Index idx
46647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46654 \begin_inset Index idx
46657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46658 Settings ! Shortcuts
46666 \begin_layout Standard
46671 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46673 Several binding files are available, among them:
46676 \begin_layout Description
46677 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46680 \begin_layout Description
46681 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46693 \begin_layout Description
46694 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46705 \begin_layout Standard
46706 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46711 , and binding files for special languages.
46712 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46717 \begin_inset space \space{}
46721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46729 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46730 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46731 will try to use the appropriate binding
46735 \begin_layout Standard
46736 Some binding files, like
46740 , only have a limited scope.
46741 When looking at the end of the file
46745 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46748 \begin_layout Standard
46752 \begin_inset space ~
46756 \begin_inset space ~
46761 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46762 in the selected key binding file.
46765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46769 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46774 \begin_inset Index idx
46777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46778 Key Bindings ! Editing
46786 \begin_layout Standard
46787 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46788 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46789 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46790 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46793 Show key-bindings containing
46796 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46797 Insert there for example as keyword
46798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46805 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46806 functions that contain
46807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46815 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46816 All \SpecialChar LyX
46817 functions are also listed in the file
46822 that you will find in the
46829 \begin_layout Standard
46830 For example, to add the shortcut
46838 , select the function and press the
46843 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46844 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46847 \begin_layout Standard
46848 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46849 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46851 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46852 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46854 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46859 \begin_layout Standard
46860 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46863 \begin_layout Standard
46864 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46866 The syntax of the entries is:
46869 \begin_layout Standard
46875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46894 \begin_layout Subsection
46896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46898 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46903 \begin_inset Index idx
46906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46913 \begin_inset Index idx
46916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46917 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46925 \begin_layout Standard
46926 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46927 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46928 provides keyboard maps.
46929 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46930 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46933 \begin_inset space ~
46937 \begin_inset space ~
46942 and select the keyboard map file named
46949 \begin_layout Standard
46958 keyboard map and, if you use the
46962 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46965 arg "keymap-primary"
46971 arg "keymap-secondary"
46974 respectively or toggle between them with
46977 arg "keymap-toggle"
46983 \begin_layout Standard
46984 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46992 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
47001 \begin_layout Standard
47002 You can also specify the mouse
47004 Wheel scrolling speed
47007 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
47011 Middle mouse button pasting
47013 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
47014 inserts the content of the clipboard.
47017 \begin_layout Standard
47025 \begin_inset space ~
47029 \begin_inset space ~
47034 you can select a key for zooming.
47035 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
47038 \begin_layout Subsection
47042 \begin_layout Standard
47043 Input completion is described in section
47044 \begin_inset space ~
47048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47050 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
47057 \begin_layout Section
47059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47066 \begin_inset Index idx
47069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47076 \begin_inset Index idx
47079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47088 \begin_layout Standard
47089 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
47090 are normally determined during
47092 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
47095 \begin_layout Description
47097 \begin_inset space ~
47100 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
47101 's working directory.
47102 It is the default when you
47113 \begin_inset space ~
47121 \begin_layout Description
47123 \begin_inset space ~
47126 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47128 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47130 \begin_inset space ~
47134 \begin_inset space ~
47142 \begin_layout Description
47144 \begin_inset space ~
47147 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47153 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47157 \begin_inset Newline newline
47161 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47173 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47174 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47182 \begin_layout Description
47184 \begin_inset space ~
47188 \begin_inset Index idx
47191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47197 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47198 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47199 \begin_inset space ~
47203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47205 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47213 will be used to save the backups.
47214 \begin_inset Newline newline
47217 Backup files have the ending
47218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47228 \begin_layout Description
47230 \begin_inset space ~
47233 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47234 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47236 \begin_inset Newline newline
47243 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47249 You can edit this file with the program
47258 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47259 in its preferences under
47262 \begin_inset space ~
47268 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47273 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47275 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47276 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47282 and \SpecialChar LyX
47283 need to be running the same time.
47284 \begin_inset Newline newline
47287 The pipe is also used for the
47291 feature, see section
47292 \begin_inset space ~
47296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47298 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47303 \begin_inset Newline newline
47306 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47307 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47308 \begin_inset Newline newline
47324 \begin_layout Description
47326 \begin_inset space ~
47329 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47332 \begin_layout Description
47334 \begin_inset space ~
47337 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47338 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47339 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47342 \begin_layout Description
47344 \begin_inset space ~
47347 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47353 You only need to specify it if you are using
47357 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47359 For \SpecialChar LyX
47364 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47368 \begin_layout Description
47370 \begin_inset space ~
47373 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47374 When \SpecialChar LyX
47375 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47376 to find it on the system.
47377 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47379 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47388 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47389 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47392 \begin_layout Description
47394 \begin_inset space ~
47397 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47398 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47399 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47400 code or in the document
47402 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47404 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47405 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47406 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47407 scanned for the input files.
47408 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47409 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47411 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47412 compilation may fail for some documents.
47415 \begin_layout Section
47419 \begin_layout Standard
47420 Here you can insert your
47429 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47431 \begin_inset space ~
47435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47437 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47441 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47444 \begin_layout Section
47446 \begin_inset Index idx
47449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47450 Language ! Settings
47456 \begin_inset Index idx
47459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47460 Settings ! Language
47468 \begin_layout Subsection
47470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47472 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47479 \begin_layout Description
47481 \begin_inset space ~
47485 \begin_inset space ~
47488 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47490 You can find its actual translation status here:
47491 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47493 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47501 \begin_layout Description
47503 \begin_inset space ~
47506 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47507 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47508 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47509 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47526 The most widespread language package is
47531 \begin_inset Index idx
47534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47541 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47543 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47544 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47545 come with the alternative
47551 \begin_inset Index idx
47554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47556 -packages ! polyglossia
47561 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47562 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47568 The available selections are described in section
47569 \begin_inset space ~
47573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47575 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47582 \begin_layout Description
47584 \begin_inset space ~
47587 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47588 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47589 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47590 An example is the start command
47596 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47598 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47602 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47618 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47623 \begin_layout Description
47625 \begin_inset space ~
47633 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47634 command toggles the package on and off.
47637 \begin_layout Description
47639 \begin_inset space ~
47643 \begin_inset space ~
47646 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47650 \begin_layout Description
47652 \begin_inset space ~
47656 \begin_inset space ~
47659 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47663 \begin_layout Description
47665 \begin_inset space ~
47669 \begin_inset space ~
47672 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47673 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47674 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47676 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47683 \begin_layout Description
47685 \begin_inset space ~
47688 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47690 When this option is not set, the
47693 \begin_inset space ~
47698 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47700 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47703 \begin_inset space ~
47711 \begin_layout Description
47713 \begin_inset space ~
47719 \begin_inset space ~
47725 When it is not set, the
47728 \begin_inset space ~
47733 is set to the end of the document.
47736 \begin_layout Description
47738 \begin_inset space ~
47742 \begin_inset space ~
47745 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47746 language will be underlined in blue.
47749 \begin_layout Description
47751 \begin_inset space ~
47755 \begin_inset space ~
47758 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47759 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47762 \begin_layout Description
47764 \begin_inset space ~
47767 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47768 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47769 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47770 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47773 \begin_layout Subsection
47777 \begin_layout Standard
47778 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47779 \begin_inset space ~
47783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47785 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47792 \begin_layout Section
47796 \begin_layout Subsection
47798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47800 name "subsec:General-output"
47807 \begin_layout Description
47809 \begin_inset space ~
47812 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47814 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47816 \begin_inset space ~
47822 For a detailed description see section
47824 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47829 \begin_inset space ~
47837 \begin_layout Description
47839 \begin_inset space ~
47842 Options Options for the program
47846 that is used for the export format
47851 \begin_inset space ~
47855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47857 reference "subsec:Export"
47862 Possible options are listed in the
47867 \begin_inset Newline newline
47871 \begin_inset Flex URL
47874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47876 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47886 \begin_layout Description
47888 \begin_inset space ~
47892 \begin_inset space ~
47895 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47898 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47899 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47901 \begin_inset space ~
47907 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47910 \begin_layout Description
47912 \begin_inset space ~
47916 \begin_inset Index idx
47919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47926 \begin_inset Index idx
47929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47930 Settings ! Date format
47935 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47936 \begin_inset Newline newline
47940 \begin_inset Flex URL
47943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47945 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47951 \begin_inset Newline newline
47954 For example the format
47955 \begin_inset Newline newline
47959 \begin_inset Newline newline
47962 prints the date as day/month/year.
47965 \begin_layout Description
47967 \begin_inset space ~
47971 \begin_inset space ~
47974 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47975 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47978 \begin_layout Subsection
47984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47986 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47991 \begin_inset Index idx
47994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47995 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
48004 \begin_layout Description
48006 \begin_inset space ~
48014 \begin_inset space ~
48018 \begin_inset space ~
48021 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
48026 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
48047 are used for Cyrillic.
48048 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
48049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48061 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
48063 sets up in the background.
48064 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
48067 \begin_layout Description
48069 \begin_inset space ~
48073 \begin_inset space ~
48077 \begin_inset space ~
48081 \begin_inset space ~
48084 options They only have an effect when the program
48088 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
48091 \begin_layout Standard
48092 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
48093 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
48094 manuals of the applications.
48097 \begin_layout Description
48099 \begin_inset space ~
48102 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
48103 \begin_inset space ~
48107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48109 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48116 \begin_layout Description
48118 \begin_inset space ~
48121 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48122 \begin_inset space ~
48126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48128 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48135 \begin_layout Description
48137 \begin_inset space ~
48140 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48141 \begin_inset space ~
48145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48147 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48154 \begin_layout Description
48160 \begin_inset space ~
48163 command Command for the program
48165 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48168 that is described in the section
48170 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48175 Additional Features
48180 \begin_layout Standard
48181 There are additionally the following options:
48184 \begin_layout Description
48186 \begin_inset space ~
48190 \begin_inset space ~
48194 \begin_inset space ~
48198 \begin_inset space ~
48203 \begin_inset space ~
48206 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48224 to separate folders.
48225 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48227 \begin_inset Index idx
48230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48237 \begin_inset Index idx
48240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48249 \begin_layout Description
48251 \begin_inset space ~
48255 \begin_inset space ~
48259 \begin_inset space ~
48263 \begin_inset space ~
48267 \begin_inset space ~
48271 \begin_inset space ~
48274 changes Removes all manually set
48280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48281 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48283 \begin_inset space ~
48288 dialog when changing the document class.
48291 \begin_layout Section
48293 \begin_inset space ~
48297 \begin_inset Index idx
48300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48309 \begin_layout Subsection
48311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48313 name "subsec:Converters"
48318 \begin_inset Index idx
48321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48330 \begin_layout Standard
48331 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48332 from one format to another.
48333 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48334 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48341 \begin_inset space ~
48346 field and press the
48351 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48355 \begin_inset space ~
48360 drop-down list, modify the
48364 field and press the
48371 \begin_layout Standard
48374 Converter File Cache
48380 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48382 Maximum Age (in days
48385 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48386 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48389 \begin_layout Standard
48390 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48391 definition, is described in the section
48402 \begin_layout Subsection
48404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48406 name "sec:File-Formats"
48411 \begin_inset Index idx
48414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48421 \begin_inset Index idx
48424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48433 \begin_layout Standard
48434 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48444 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48447 \begin_layout Standard
48448 You can also define the
48450 Default output format
48452 that is used when you use
48454 View, Update, View Master Document
48458 Update Master Document
48464 menu or the toolbar.
48467 \begin_layout Standard
48468 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48479 \begin_layout Standard
48480 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48482 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48483 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48484 This is done by specifying a
48489 More about this is described in the section
48500 \begin_layout Chapter
48501 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48503 \begin_inset Index idx
48506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48513 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48515 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48522 \begin_layout Standard
48524 \begin_inset space ~
48528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48530 reference "tab:Units"
48534 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48535 and used in this documentation.
48538 \begin_layout Standard
48539 \begin_inset Float table
48545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48546 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48564 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48572 \begin_inset Tabular
48573 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48574 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48575 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48576 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48577 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48783 scaled point (65536
48784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48862 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48935 % of original image width
48940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49251 \begin_layout Chapter
49253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49255 name "chap:Credits"
49262 \begin_layout Standard
49263 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49264 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49267 \begin_layout Itemize
49270 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49273 \begin_layout Itemize
49279 \begin_layout Itemize
49285 \begin_layout Itemize
49291 \begin_layout Itemize
49297 \begin_layout Itemize
49303 \begin_layout Itemize
49309 \begin_layout Itemize
49315 \begin_layout Itemize
49318 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49321 \begin_layout Itemize
49327 \begin_layout Itemize
49333 \begin_layout Itemize
49339 \begin_layout Itemize
49345 \begin_layout Itemize
49351 \begin_layout Itemize
49357 \begin_layout Itemize
49363 \begin_layout Itemize
49369 \begin_layout Itemize
49370 The \SpecialChar LyX
49372 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49382 \begin_layout Standard
49383 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49386 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49393 \begin_layout Bibliography
49394 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49395 LatexCommand bibitem
49402 The \SpecialChar LyX
49404 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49407 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49413 \begin_inset Newline newline
49417 \begin_inset Flex URL
49420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49422 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49430 \begin_layout Bibliography
49431 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49432 LatexCommand bibitem
49433 key "latexcompanion"
49438 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49440 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49441 Companion Second Edition.
49444 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49447 \begin_layout Bibliography
49448 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49449 LatexCommand bibitem
49455 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49458 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49462 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49465 \begin_layout Bibliography
49466 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49467 LatexCommand bibitem
49476 : A Document Preparation System.
49479 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49482 \begin_layout Bibliography
49483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49484 LatexCommand bibitem
49494 The \SpecialChar TeX
49498 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49501 \begin_layout Bibliography
49502 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49503 LatexCommand bibitem
49509 The \SpecialChar TeX
49511 \begin_inset Newline newline
49515 \begin_inset Flex URL
49518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49520 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49528 \begin_layout Bibliography
49529 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49530 LatexCommand bibitem
49536 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49538 \begin_inset Newline newline
49542 \begin_inset Flex URL
49545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49547 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49555 \begin_layout Bibliography
49556 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49557 LatexCommand bibitem
49564 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49566 name "Documentation"
49567 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49574 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49578 \begin_inset Newline newline
49582 \begin_inset Flex URL
49585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49587 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49595 \begin_layout Bibliography
49596 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49597 LatexCommand bibitem
49604 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49606 name "Documentation"
49607 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49612 how to use the program
49614 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49618 \begin_inset Newline newline
49622 \begin_inset Flex URL
49625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49627 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49633 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884806
49637 \begin_layout Bibliography
49639 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884882
49640 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49641 LatexCommand bibitem
49648 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49651 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49661 \begin_inset Newline newline
49665 \begin_inset Flex URL
49668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49670 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884888
49672 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49682 \begin_layout Bibliography
49683 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49684 LatexCommand bibitem
49691 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49693 name "Documentation"
49694 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49704 \begin_inset Newline newline
49708 \begin_inset Flex URL
49711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49713 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49721 \begin_layout Bibliography
49722 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49723 LatexCommand bibitem
49724 key "makeindex-man"
49730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49733 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49743 \begin_inset Newline newline
49747 \begin_inset Flex URL
49750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49752 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49760 \begin_layout Bibliography
49761 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49762 LatexCommand bibitem
49769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49771 name "Documentation"
49772 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49782 \begin_inset Newline newline
49786 \begin_inset Flex URL
49789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49791 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49799 \begin_layout Bibliography
49800 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49801 LatexCommand bibitem
49808 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49810 name "Documentation"
49811 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49816 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49818 \begin_inset Newline newline
49822 \begin_inset Flex URL
49825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49827 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49835 \begin_layout Bibliography
49836 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49837 LatexCommand bibitem
49844 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49846 name "Documentation"
49847 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49852 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49858 \begin_inset Index idx
49861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49863 -packages ! caption
49869 \begin_inset Newline newline
49873 \begin_inset Flex URL
49876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49878 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49886 \begin_layout Bibliography
49887 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49888 LatexCommand bibitem
49895 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49897 name "Documentation"
49898 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49903 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49909 \begin_inset Index idx
49912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49914 -packages ! enumitem
49920 \begin_inset Newline newline
49924 \begin_inset Flex URL
49927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49929 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49937 \begin_layout Bibliography
49938 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49939 LatexCommand bibitem
49946 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49948 name "Documentation"
49949 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49954 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49960 \begin_inset Index idx
49963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49965 -packages ! fancyhdr
49971 \begin_inset Newline newline
49975 \begin_inset Flex URL
49978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49980 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49988 \begin_layout Bibliography
49989 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49990 LatexCommand bibitem
49997 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49999 name "Documentation"
50000 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
50005 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50011 \begin_inset Index idx
50014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50016 -packages ! hyperref
50022 \begin_inset Newline newline
50026 \begin_inset Flex URL
50029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50031 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
50039 \begin_layout Bibliography
50040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50041 LatexCommand bibitem
50048 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50050 name "Documentation"
50051 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
50056 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50062 \begin_inset Index idx
50065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50067 -packages ! nomencl
50073 \begin_inset Newline newline
50077 \begin_inset Flex URL
50080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50082 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50090 \begin_layout Bibliography
50091 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50092 LatexCommand bibitem
50099 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50101 name "Documentation"
50102 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50107 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50113 \begin_inset Index idx
50116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50118 -packages ! prettyref
50124 \begin_inset Newline newline
50128 \begin_inset Flex URL
50131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50133 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50141 \begin_layout Bibliography
50142 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50143 LatexCommand bibitem
50150 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50152 name "Documentation"
50153 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50158 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50164 \begin_inset Index idx
50167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50169 -packages ! refstyle
50175 \begin_inset Newline newline
50179 \begin_inset Flex URL
50182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50184 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50192 \begin_layout Bibliography
50193 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50194 LatexCommand bibitem
50201 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50204 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50209 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50211 \begin_inset Newline newline
50215 \begin_inset Flex URL
50218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50220 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50228 \begin_layout Bibliography
50229 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50230 LatexCommand bibitem
50237 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50240 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50245 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50247 \begin_inset Newline newline
50251 \begin_inset Flex URL
50254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50256 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50264 \begin_layout Bibliography
50265 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50266 LatexCommand bibitem
50273 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50276 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50281 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50282 for Cyrillic languages:
50283 \begin_inset Newline newline
50287 \begin_inset Flex URL
50290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50292 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50300 \begin_layout Bibliography
50301 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50302 LatexCommand bibitem
50309 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50312 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50317 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50319 \begin_inset Newline newline
50323 \begin_inset Flex URL
50326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50328 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50336 \begin_layout Bibliography
50337 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50338 LatexCommand bibitem
50345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50348 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50353 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50355 \begin_inset Newline newline
50359 \begin_inset Flex URL
50362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50364 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50372 \begin_layout Bibliography
50373 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50374 LatexCommand bibitem
50381 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50384 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50389 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50391 \begin_inset Newline newline
50395 \begin_inset Flex URL
50398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50400 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50408 \begin_layout Bibliography
50409 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50410 LatexCommand bibitem
50417 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50420 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50425 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50427 \begin_inset Newline newline
50431 \begin_inset Flex URL
50434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50436 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50444 \begin_layout Bibliography
50445 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50446 LatexCommand bibitem
50453 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50456 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50461 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50463 \begin_inset Newline newline
50467 \begin_inset Flex URL
50470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50472 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50480 \begin_layout Bibliography
50481 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50482 LatexCommand bibitem
50489 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50492 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50497 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50499 \begin_inset Newline newline
50503 \begin_inset Flex URL
50506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50508 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50516 \begin_layout Bibliography
50517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50518 LatexCommand bibitem
50525 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50528 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50533 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50535 \begin_inset Newline newline
50539 \begin_inset Flex URL
50542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50544 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50552 \begin_layout Bibliography
50553 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50554 LatexCommand bibitem
50561 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50564 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50569 about new features in
50575 \begin_inset Newline newline
50579 \begin_inset Flex URL
50582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50584 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50592 \begin_layout Standard
50593 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50627 \begin_inset Note Note
50630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50637 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50638 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50639 bibliography is the second one:
50647 \begin_layout Standard
50648 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50649 LatexCommand bibtex
50650 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50651 options "biblio/alphadin"
50658 \begin_layout Standard
50659 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50663 \begin_layout Standard
50664 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50665 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50671 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50672 LatexCommand printindex